2014 Dodge Avenger Owne&#39

2014 Dodge Avenger Owne&#39
2014 Avenger
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
14D41-126-AB
Second Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Avenger
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler
Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t
drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a
friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on
this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your
judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never
drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2013 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfacLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
tion.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears stamped on the right front door sill
under the sill moulding and printed on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .21
▫ Locking Doors With A Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
(RKE) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ To Unlock The Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . .19
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters.
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
. . . . . . .22
. . . . . . .22
. . . . . . .25
. . . . . . .26
. . . . . . .26
. . . . . . .26
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Window Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
䡵 REMOTE START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . .28 䡵 TRUNK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Trunk Internal Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .51
䡵 POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Auto Window Down — If Equipped . . . . . . . .37
▫ Auto Window Up With Anti-Pinch
Protection— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ Rear Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .52
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . .54
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Air Bag System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .66
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .96
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has
the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these
numbers and keep them in a safe place.
You can insert the double-sided keys into the locks with
either side up.
Vehicle Key
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transaxle
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to
the ACC position, push the key and cylinder inward,
rotate the key to the LOCK position, and remove the key.
2
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — LOCK
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If you try to remove the key before you place the shift
lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch lock cylinder. If this occurs,
place the shift lever in PARK, rotate the key to the right
slightly, then remove the key as described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the
ignition switch lock cylinder to warn you that this
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
and stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you
obtain service.
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening either door will cancel this feature.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE:
• The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the
ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position.
• With either front door open, and the key in the
ignition, neither the power door locks nor Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will function.
Locking Doors With A Key
There is only one external door lock cylinder which is
located in the driver’s door.
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the
key forward. For door lock lubrication, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the
engine.
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the Vehicle Security Light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is
a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the Vehicle
Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Sentry Key® from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
This PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of
keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an
authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank
key is one which has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Customer Key Programming
Replacement Keys
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
valid Sentry Keys® by performing the following procevehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
dure:
a Sentry Key® has been programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key® Transponder blank(s)
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position for at
least 3 seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then,
turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the first key.
The new Sentry Key® is programmed. The Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key® into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
within 60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime
will sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will
stop flashing. To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for
three seconds and then turn off.
rized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed Sentry Key®, contact your
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch. authorized dealer for details.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
within 15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the syssound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will tems memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting
begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reproposition and remove the second key.
grammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an authoGeneral Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
• This device must accept any interference that may be Rearming The System
received, including interference that may cause unde- If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
sired operation.
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors and trunk rearm itself.
for unauthorized entry and ignition switch for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is To Arm The System
armed, interior switches for door locks and decklid 1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out
release are disabled.
of the vehicle.
If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security 2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch
Alarm will signal for about 18 minutes. For the first three
(one door must be open) or the LOCK button on the
minutes, the horn will sound intermittently, the headRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (doors can be
lights will turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals
open or closed), and close all doors.
will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the cluster will
flash. Then the exterior lights will flash for another 15 NOTE: The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you
lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers.
minutes.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash for 16 seconds. This shows that the Vehicle
Security Alarm is arming. During this period, if a door
is opened, the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN,
or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner,
the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm.
To Disarm The System
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
or insert a valid Sentry Key® into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key to the ON/START position.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
• During the 16-second arming period, if a door is
Security Alarm.
opened or the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN,
the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm. • The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not disarm
• Once armed, the Vehicle Security Alarm disables the
the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the
unlock switch on the driver door trim panel and
vehicle through the trunk and opens any door, the
passenger door trim panel, the trunk release button on
alarm will sound.
the instrument panel, and the HomeLink®/Garage
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
Door Opener (if equipped).
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one
NOTE:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the
vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you press the
unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
The interior lights will fade to off after approximately
30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the
Tamper Alert
ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF
If the alarm was triggered, but the warning signals have position.
timed out, the park and taillights flash three times, and
the horn will chirp three times, when unlocking the NOTE:
vehicle with a valid RKE transmitter to alert the driver. • The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will remain on if the dimmer control is in
the ⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) —
IF EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open
the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to
be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE:
Vehicle Key
• The line of transmission must not be blocked with To Unlock The Doors
metal objects.
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
• Inserting the key into the ignition switch disables all transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to
unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash to
buttons on the RKE transmitter.
acknowledge the unlock signal. The Illuminated Entry
system (if equipped) will also turn on.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the
key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
its previous setting.
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understandinside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
system. Opening a door with the system activated will
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to
following procedure:
deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system.
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not
longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the
UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transThe feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
mitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitkey removed.
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand- the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
system. Opening a door with the system activated will
cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system.
following procedure:
Illuminated Approach — If Equipped
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but not longer This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
button while still holding the UNLOCK button.
equipped with EVIC. For details, refer to “Electronic
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
Flash Lights With Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but not longer than 10
To Lock The Doors
seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitholding the LOCK button.
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal. 2. Release both buttons at the same time.
Sound Horn With Lock
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed.
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
follows:
its previous setting.
• For vehicles equipped with EVIC, refer to “Electronic NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand- the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm.
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Opening a door with the alarm activated will cause the NOTE: You may need to be close to the vehicle when
alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due
to the Radio Frequency (RF) noises emitted by the
the Vehicle Security Alarm.
system.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two Programming Additional Transmitters
times to unlatch the trunk.
Refer to Sentry Key® “Customer Key Programming.”
Using The Panic Alarm
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights turn on, the park lights will flash, the horn
will pulse on and off, and the Illuminated Entry system
(if equipped) will turn on.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless 1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
during removal.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Separating RKE Transmitter Halves
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause distance, check for these two conditions:
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life
with rubbing alcohol.
of a battery is five years.
3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station • Doors closed
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some
• Hood closed
mobile or CB radios.
• Trunk closed
REMOTE START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• Hazard switch off
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic • System not disabled from previous remote start event
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Vehicle theft alarm not active
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled
to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
programmed).
Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start premawill
remain
in
the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
turely:
cycle.
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The hood is opened
• If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and • The hazard switch is pressed
then shut down 10 seconds later.
• The transmission is moved out of PARK
• For security, power window operation is disabled
• The brake pedal is pressed
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
Vehicle
15 minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
third cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur: will disable the one-time press of the Remote Start button
for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start
• The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
request.
• Any engine warning lamps come on
• Low Fuel Light turns on
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
2
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
position in order to drive the vehicle.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the
inside door handle.
Manual Lock Knob
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Power Door Locks
A door lock switch is located on the driver and passenger
door panel. Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer. Please see your authorized dealer for
service.
Auto Unlock On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
Power Door Lock Switch
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically 5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Press the power door unlock switch to unlock the
doors.
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
its previous setting.
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “UnderstandNOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
in accordance with local laws.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
Auto Unlock On Exit Programming
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON/
RUN and then back to LOCK four times, ending up in
the LOCK position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
The Child-Protection Door Locks are located inside the
rear edge of the door. Insert the tip of the ignition key or
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the similar flat-bladed object into the lock and rotate clockrear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have a Child- wise approximately one-quarter turn to the lock position
or counter clockwise to the unlock position (as indicated
Protection Door Lock system.
by the stamped icons).
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
Child Lock Control
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
pull the lock knob up (UNLOCKED position), roll down
the window, and open the door with the outside door
handle.
POWER WINDOWS
AUTO Power Window Switch
There is a single window control on the front and rear
Power Window Switches
passenger’s door trim panel, which operates the front
The control on the driver’s door has up/down switches
and rear passenger door windows. The window controls
that give you fingertip control of all four power winwill operate when the ignition switch is turned to the
dows.
ON/RUN or ACC position, and when the accessory
delay feature is active.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
Auto Window Down — If Equipped
The front window controls on the driver and passenger
door trim panels have an Auto-Down feature. These
switches are labeled AUTO to indicate this capability.
Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch
either in the up or down direction and release the switch.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will
cancel this feature.
For vehicles equipped with EVIC, the power window
switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned off. Opening either door will
cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
first detent and hold to close window manually.
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
Auto Window Up With Anti-Pinch Protection—
If Equipped
To cancel the Auto Up movement, operate the switch
either in the up or down direction and release the switch.
WARNING!
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
When the window is almost closed, there is no
anti-pinch protection. To avoid personal injury, be
sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects
from the window path before closing.
NOTE:
Reset Auto Up
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, the anti-pinch protection will reverse the Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
window direction. Remove the obstacle and lift the probably needs to be reset. To reactivate the Auto Up
feature, pull the window switch up to close the window
window switch to close the window.
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window LOCK button. To enable the window controls,
press the window control button again.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
AUTO Power Window Switch
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
TRUNK RELEASE
Trunk Release
Button
With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or with the
key out, the word “dECK” will display until the trunk is
closed.
Use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter to open the trunk from On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
outside the vehicle. From inside the equipped vehicles, the words “Trunk Ajar” will display.
vehicle the trunk lid can be released by
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
located on the instrument panel to the
WARNING!
left of the steering wheel.
NOTE: The shift lever must be in PARK for this switch to
operate.
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the
word “dECK” will display in place of the odometer
display indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer
display will reappear once the trunk is closed or if the
trip button is depressed.
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Trunk Internal Emergency Release
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency
Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism.
In the event of an individual being locked inside the
trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the
glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching
mechanism.
2
Trunk Internal Emergency Release
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
item in a seat.
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint) — if equipped
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
possible.
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tethers
wheel
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may CHildren (LATCH).
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
energy during an impact event
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the severity and type of collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
facing child seat) must ride in the front passenger seat,
buckled up in a rear seat.
move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper
child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat 4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt posiside air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
tioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
between you and the door.
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under “If You Need Assistance”.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulon short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver der part of the belt to move freely with you under normal
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen conditions. However, in a collision the belt will lock and
reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
far away from home or on your own street.
being thrown out.
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull
out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far
as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
WARNING!
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in
a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to create a fold
that begins immediately above the latch plate.
2
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the belt away from
your neck. Push ANCHORAGE button to release the
anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that
fits you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• N/A — Not Applicable
Rear Seat Belts
The shoulder belt anchorages of the rear three-point belts • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
are nonadjustable for outboard and center rear passenIf the passenger seating position is equipped with an
gers on sedans. The center belt is mounted to the rear
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
shelf panel and exits through a bezel in the panel.
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re- out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortstraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
feature for each seating position.
First Row
Second
Row
Driver
N/A
ALR
Center
N/A
ALR
Passenger
ALR
ALR
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretencollision.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
the occupant’s chest.
These head restraints are passive, deployable compoSeat Belt Pretensioners
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
The seat belts for both front seating positions are identified by any markings, only through visual inspecequipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
These devices may improve the performance of the seat trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
Energy Management Feature
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
2
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may 1 — Head Restraint Front Half
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact. (Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision, 2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
a comfortable position.
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they 3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock • For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
into the back decorative plastic half.
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
NOTE:
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
AHR In Reset Position
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
stowed.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your autho- Seat Belt Extender
rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
deactivating BeltAlert®.
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS
AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt
restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air Bag is
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolsters
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. If the
Advanced Air Bags.
vehicle is equipped with SABIC, they are located above
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
the side windows. The trim covering the side air bags is
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
inflation that are based on several factors, including the
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seatseverity and type of collision.
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
but they will open during air bag deployment.
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Advanced Front Air Bags.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag System Components
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
system components:
and Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
• Air Bag Warning Light
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) Location
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for sideimpact head injuries. The SABIC air bags deploy down- NOTE:
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain
free from any obstructions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
• Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their
body outside of the window.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially chil- Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
dren, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
required for this vehicle.
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
child.
bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags, and
Knee Impact Bolsters
front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the the severity and type of impact.
driver and front passengers, and position front occupants
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addifor the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
Bags.
certain frontal collisions depending on several factors,
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front including the severity and type of collision. Advanced
Air Bags work with the knee impact bolsters to provide Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
improved protection for the driver and front passenger. injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are During collisions where the impact is confined to a
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
collision.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
triggered, releasing a large quantity of non-toxic gas. The
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
inflates in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
at a very high speed and with such a high force that it
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates.
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
This especially applies to children.
it is inflated.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
removed.
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
• Unlock the doors automatically.
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
events.
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
Enhanced Accident Response System
If A Deployment Occurs
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deabrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium bags will not be in place to protect you.
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
WARNING!
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
immediately.
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of the mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Conprocess that generates the non-toxic gas used for air troller System serviced as well.
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Air Bag Warning Light
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check
the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located
on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag
fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of Event Data Recorder (EDR)
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
the air bag system immediately.
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems perfirst turned to the ON/RUN position.
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
eight second interval.
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or is designed to record such data as:
remains on while driving.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
were buckled/fastened;
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipaccelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
vehicle or the EDR.
These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraints
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a times, including babies and children. Every state in the
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by United States, and every Canadian province, requires
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
crash investigation.
the rear seats rather than in the front.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or
call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer
to Transport Canada’s website for additional information:
• http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and
Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit perivehicle’s seat belt alone:
odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
the vehicle seat?
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the or behind their back.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages?
No
Yes
Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH anchorage system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seating
position.
You can install child restraints with flexible
lower anchors in the center position. The
inner anchorages are 15.4 inches (392 mm)
apart. Do not install child restraints with
rigid lower anchors in the center position.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to
install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH
anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
2
Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seatback and the rear
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
window. These tether strap anchorages are under a LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
plastic cover with the tether anchorage symbol on it.
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Tether Strap Anchorages
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments in the center seating position. Only install this type
of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child
restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be installed in any rear seating position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCHcompatible child restraints next to each other, you
must use the seat belt for the center position. You can
then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s
seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard
positions. Please refer to “Installing The LATCHCompatible Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions.
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manuforward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the car seat.
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto- 4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seatmatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
ing position.
belt following the instructions below. See the section
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
WARNING!
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) used by other occupants or being used to secure child
in any direction.
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight
when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
child restraint’s belt path. Please see the following
table(s) and the following sections for more information
about both types of seat belts.
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
No
Yes
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted
up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle
stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
more room for the car seat.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
“click.”
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the car seat.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
path.
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
“click.”
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
vehicle seat.
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
strap. Refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
anchor.
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm) in Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
restraint.
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for
that seating position, move the child restraint to another
position in the vehicle if one is available.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint.
2
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detriTransporting Pets
mental and should be avoided.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
a collision.
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, Defroster
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inopercollision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
able.
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt Floor Mat Safety Information
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
The light should come on and remain on for
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized
Air Bag Warning Light
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Tires
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 䡵 Uconnect® Phone — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .108
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Adjusting Side View Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .112
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .143
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .143
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .163
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .166
▫ Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Headlights With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Reclining Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Lumbar Support — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat . . . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ High/Low Beam Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Map/Reading/Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .172
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .180
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .181
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Headlights With Wipers Feature (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .184
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .176
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .186
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .193
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .190 䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .191
▫ Rear Seat Bottle Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
䡵 CONSOLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
▫ Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
. . . .196
. . . .196
. . . .197
. . . .198
. . . .198
. . . .198
. . . .198
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Ski Pass-Through. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on
the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
Power Mirror Control
To adjust a mirror, turn the control toward the left or right
mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control in the direction
you want the mirror to move.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Adjusting Side View Mirrors
Outside Mirror — Driver Side
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Outside Mirror — Passenger Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
vehicle.
Mirror Directions
When finished, return the knob to the center “O” (Off)
position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
position.
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature
All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and
normal.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile”,
Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect® website for
supported phones.
For Uconnect® customer support:
• U.S. residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call
1-877-855-8400.
• Canadian Residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com
or call, 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983
(French).
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone al- Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your microphone for private conversation.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Uconnect® Phone — IF EQUIPPED
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your
WARNING!
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect® features Bluetooth® technology - the global Any voice commanded system should be used only
standard that enables different electronic devices to con- in safe driving conditions following all applicable
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your atUconnect® Phone works no matter where you stow your tention should be focused on safely operating the
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to causing serious injury or death.
the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The Uconnect® Phone
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the Uconnect® Phone Button
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
English, Spanish, or French languages.
button and Voice Com(Uconnect® Phone
mand
button) that will enable you to
access the system. When you press the button you will
hear the word Uconnect® followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Voice Command Button
Operation
Actual button location may vary with the ra- Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
dio. The individual buttons are described in the Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
“Operation” section.
Uconnect® Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
The Uconnect® Phone can be used with any Hands-Free specific command and then guided through the available
Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile phone. See the options.
Uconnect® website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another
details.
prompt.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone • For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth® Device.”
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
the Uconnect® Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
can also break the commands into parts and say each
certain radios.
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice command “Phonebook New Entry,” or you can break the
compound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry.” Please remember, the
Uconnect® Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
To activate the Uconnect® Phone, simply press the
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
Uconnect® Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
To complete the pairing process, you will need to referthe beep. The Uconnect® Phone will play some of the
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
The following are general phone to Uconnect® Phone • You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
pairing instructions:
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
button to begin.
• Press the
phones to your Uconnect® Phone. However, at any
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Device Pairing.”
connected to your Uconnect® System. The priority
allows the Uconnect® Phone to know which mobile
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
and follow the audible prompts.
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identiand priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect® Phone will use the priority three mobile
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
after the initial pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to Dial By Saying A Number
give the Uconnect® Phone a name for your mobile
button to begin.
• Press the
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
given a unique phone name.
“Dial.”
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
• For example, you can say “151–1234–5555.”
• The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
• Press the
button to begin.
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect® Phonebook.”
• The Uconnect® system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
appear in the display of certain radios.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
“Call.”
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
Book Access Profile may support this feature. See
person you want to call.
Uconnect® website for supported phones.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• To call a name from the Uconnect® Phonebook or
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call
you can say “John Doe,” where John Doe is a previby Saying a Name” section.
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect® phonebook
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transmade to the Uconnect® Phone, for example, after you
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
start the vehicle.
phone connection.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected Add Names To Your Uconnect® Phonebook
to the Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebook is
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
button to begin.
• Press the
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail- • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry.”
able for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recomphone is accessible.
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
• Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the mobile
instead of “Bob.”
phone’s SIM card phonebook is downloaded.
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonewhen the vehicle is not in motion. Automatic downbook entry, if desired.
loaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
button to begin.
• Press the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone“Phonebook Edit.”
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the • You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
main menu.
entry that you wish to edit.
The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 • Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
phonebook entry that you are editing.
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, • After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
to the main menu.
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
“Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another phone
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
number to a name entry that already exists in the
from the list, press the
button while the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
Uconnect® Phone is playing the desired entry and say
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
“Delete.”
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit”
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect® Phone will
feature.
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
wish to delete.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
button to begin.
• Press the
language is deleted.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
“Phonebook Delete.”
deleted or edited.
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
• Press the
button to begin.
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
but“Phonebook Erase All.”
ton during the playing of the desired name, and say
• The Uconnect® Phone will ask you to verify that you
“Call.”
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be operations at this point.
deleted.
• The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt you as to the
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language
number designation you wish to call.
is deleted.
• The selected number will be dialed.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
Phone Call Features
deleted or edited.
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
• Press the
button to begin.
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
“Phonebook List Names.”
List All Names In The Uconnect® Phonebook
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys- Progress
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
button to accept the call. To reject the
call. Press the
call, press and hold the
button until you hear a single
beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button to place the current
mobile phone. Press the
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
press the
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Conference Call” in this section.
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
butbring the call back from hold, press and hold the
ton until you hear a single beep.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button while
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress.” After the second call has established,
button until you hear a double
press and hold the
Toggling Between Calls
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), one conference call.
press the
button until you hear a single beep, indicatCall Termination
ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have
butswitched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time. To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
ton. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
Conference Call
is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on
button until you hear a hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
hold), press and hold the
double beep indicating that the two calls have been phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
joined into one conference call.
button until you hear a single beep.
and hold the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Redial
• Press the
button to begin.
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue
“Redial.”
on the Uconnect® Phone for a certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
• The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that
Uconnect® Phone to the mobile phone.
was dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the • An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF.
Uconnect® Phone.
Call Continuation
Uconnect® Phone Features
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Language Selection
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
To change the language that the Uconnect® Phone is
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality availusing:
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
button to begin.
• Press the
• After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
the name of the language you wish to switch to operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
English, Espanol, or Francais.
button to begin.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the • Press the
language selection.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
voice commands will be in that language.
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
NOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone language change
Mexico.
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not language- NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
specific and is usable across all languages.
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Emergency Assistance
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
reachable:
area.
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency • If supported, this number may be programmable on
button and say
some systems. To do this, press the
number for your area.
“Setup,” followed by “Emergency.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your NOTE: You should program the desired Towing Assischances of successfully making a phone call as to that tance phone number using the Voice Command system.
To do this, press the button and say “Setup,” followed by
for the mobile phone directly.
“Towing Assistance.” When prompted say 1-800-5282069 for the U.S., say 1-800-363-4869 for Canada, say
WARNING!
55-14- 3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outTo use you Uconnect® Phone System in an emer- side Mexico City in Mexico.
gency, your mobile phone must be:
Paging
• turned on,
• paired to the Uconnect® System,
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
• and have network coverage.
Systems.” Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
Roadside Assistance / Towing Assistance
work properly with the Uconnect® Phone.
If you need roadside assistance:
Voice Mail Calling
button to begin.
• Press the
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say with Automated Systems.”
“Towing Assistance.”
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
“Send,” is also to be used for navigating through an
automated customer service center menu structure, and
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to leave a number on a pager.
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can also send stored Uconnect® phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
call and then press the
button and say, “Send.” The
or automated customer service line. Some services resystem will prompt you to enter the name or number and
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
The Uconnect® Phone will then send the corresponding
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence tones over the phone.
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, NOTE:
followed by the word “Send.” For example, if required to • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you
network configurations. This is normal.
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send.”
can press the
Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by
Working With Automated Systems
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
one of the following:
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
Barge In – Overriding Prompts
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
could press the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect® Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect® Phone
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
button to begin.
• Press the
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile • Following the beep, say “Mute.”
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
In order to un-mute the Uconnect® Phone:
audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work the same
• Press the
button.
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off.”
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect® Phone paired mobile phone to the
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
button
Uconnect® Phone or vice versa, press the
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
and say “Transfer Call.”
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect® Phone:
• Press the
button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone names of all
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
being announced, press the
button and say “Seelectronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
lect” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two sections for an
with one electronic device at a time.
alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
Select Another Mobile Phone
connection between your mobile phone and the
Uconnect® Phone System, follow the instructions de- This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the Uconnect® Phone.
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
• Press the
• Press the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
button to begin.
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button at any time while the
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
• You can also press the
list is being played, and then choose the phone that
• When prompted, say “List Phones.”
you wish to select.
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect® Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft. (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect® Phone Paired Mobile Phones
• Press the
button to begin.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone
Uconnect® Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect® Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect®
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
prompts.
button at any time while the From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g., from
• You can also press the
list is being played, and then choose the phone you radio mode):
wish to delete.
button for five seconds until
• Press and hold the
the session begins, or,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
• Press the
button and say the “Voice Training,” This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
“System Training,” or “Start Voice Training” com- and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
mand.
You can either press the Uconnect® Phone button to Voice Command
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect® Phone. For
provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
best results, the Voice Training session should be comconsole (if equipped) and the mirror.
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan • Always wait for the beep before speaking.
switched off.
• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
you.
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
• Press the
button.
• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
“Setup,” then “Reset.”
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
• Performance is maximized under:
• Low-to-medium blower setting
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Low road noise
• Smooth road surface
• Fully closed windows
• Dry weather condition
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- • You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
cents, the system may not always work for some.
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
• When navigating through an automated system such
number combinations may not be supported.
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
Far End Audio Performance
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
• Audio quality is maximized under:
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
• Low Road Noise
Recent Calls
• Smooth Road Surface
• Fully Closed Windows
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Download,” Uconnect® Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming and Missed Calls.
• Dry Weather Conditions
Voice Text Reply
• Operation From The Driver’s Seat
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness your phone.
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and Read Messages:
not the Uconnect® Phone
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be If you wish to hear the new message:
compromised with the convertible top down
button.
• Press the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Uconnect® Phone will play the new text message for List of Preset Messages:
you.
1. Yes
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
2. No
the message using Uconnect® Phone.
3. Where are you?
Send Messages:
4. I need more direction.
You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
5. L O L
a new message:
• Press the
button.
6. Why
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say 7. I love you
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
8. Call me
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say
9. Call me later
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
10. Thanks
button while the
To send a message, press the
system is listing the message and say “Send.” Uconnect® 11. See You in 15 minutes
Phone will prompt you to say the name or number of the
12. I am on my way
person you wish to send the message to.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
13. I’ll be late
14. Are you there yet?
15. Where are we meeting?
16. Can this wait?
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, Incoming Message Announcement”, you will
then be given a choice to change it.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
19. Send number to call
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth® ON mode.
20. Start without me
Power-Up
17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet?
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
Turning the Voice Text Reply Incoming Announcement system.
OFF will stop the system from announcing the new
incoming messages.
Turn Voice Text Reply Incoming Announcement
ON/OFF
• Press the
button.
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
help
home
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
pairing
phonebook
phone book
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
previous
record again
redial
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect® Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
General Information
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Voice Command System Operation
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player,
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
USB mass storage class device, iPod® family of
the party responsible for compliance could void the
devices, Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device,
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System
• This device must accept any interference received,
as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
including interference that may cause undesired opVoice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
eration.
may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
voice level.
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
Pressing the Voice Command
button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel,”
“Help” or “Main Menu.”
These commands are universal and can be used from any
button, you menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a the active application.
command.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few a normal speaking volume.
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
The system will best recognize your speech if the winoptions.
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists set to low.
button, listen for
options, press the Voice Command
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
the beep, and say your command.
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com- Main Menu
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu.”
mand
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the
Commands
main menu.
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all In this mode, you can say the following commands:
times. Local commands are available if the supported
• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
radio mode is active.
• “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
Changing The Volume
• “Sat” (to switch to Satellite radio mode)
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
• “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the • “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth®
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice ComStreaming mode)
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Radio AM
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM.” In • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio.” In this mode, you may say the following com• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
mands:
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
spoken number)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
Radio FM
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM.” In
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Disc Mode
Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) Mode
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc.” In this mode, you To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode, say
may say the following commands:
“Bluetooth Streaming.” In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “List” (to list an Artist, Playlist, Album, Track, etc.)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Memo Mode
USB Mode
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” In
To switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In this mode, you
this mode, you may say the following commands:
may say the following commands:
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
one of the following commands:
• “Play” (to play an Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
– “Save” (to save the memo)
Name, Track Name, etc.)
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
• “Switch to system setup”
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Main menu setup”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) — • “Switch to setup”
During the playback you may press the Voice Com- In this mode, you may say the following commands:
button to stop playing memos. You promand
• “Language English”
ceed by saying one of the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
• “Language French”
– “Next” (to play the next memo)
• “Language Spanish”
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
• “Tutorial”
– “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Voice Training”
– “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
Command
button first and wait for the beep
before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
Setup
To switch to system setup, you may say one of the
following:
• “Change to setup”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Voice Training
SEATS
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect® vehicle.
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect® Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is
parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
last trained voice only.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats — If Equipped
The power seat switches are on the outboard side of the
seat near the floor. Use the seat control switch to move the
seat up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat. Use
the seatback control to adjust the angle of the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Control
2 — Seat Control
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch the switch when the desired position is reached.
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each heater are located near the bottom
center of the instrument panel (below the climate controls).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. will turn OFF automatically after approximately 30 minAmber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of utes.
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
WARNING!
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
two to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near
the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat to the
desired position. After releasing the adjusting bar, apply
forward and rearward body pressure to be sure the seat
is latched.
Manual Seat Adjusting Bar
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster —
If Equipped
Reclining Seats
A lever style height adjustment feature enhances comfort
for petite as well as tall drivers. A lever with a ratcheting
mechanism, located on the outboard side of the seat,
raises and lowers it. Total travel is 2.2 in. (56 mm).
The recliner control is on the side of the seat. To recline,
lean forward slightly before lifting the lever, then lean
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment Lever
Seatback Adjustment
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. The control lever is located
on the outboard side of the driver’s seatback. Turn the
control lever downward to increase and upward to
decrease the desired amount of lumbar support.
Lumbar Support
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat
The recline handle on the front passenger seat also
releases the seatback to fold forward.
3
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
The hard seatback features a work surface and a molded impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
rim for retaining items stored on the seatback panel.
Seatback Adjustment
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compo- downward on the head restraint.
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
3
Push Button
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things to Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, the rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull on the loops shown in the picture
to fold down either or both seatbacks.
When returning the rear seat back to the upright position,
be sure the seatback is latched.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The rear seat head restraints are fixed and cannot be
adjusted. For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer
to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Folding Rear Seats
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The rear cargo area of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children.
They could be seriously injured in a collision.
Children should be seated and using the proper
restraint system.
Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest
The rear seat is equipped with a folding armrest with
cupholders.
Folding Rear Seat Armrest
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
2. Lift the secondary latch located under the front edge
of the hood, near the center and raise the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
3
Hood Safety Latch
Hood Release Lever
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole
on the left underside of the hood.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Hood Prop Rod Hole Location
Multifunction Lever
Before closing the hood, make sure to stow the prop rod
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
in its proper location.
parking lights, headlights, headlight beam selection,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
passing light, fog lights, instrument panel light dimming Headlights And Parking Lights
and turn signals. The multifunction lever is located on Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
the left side of the steering column.
for parking light operation. Turn to the second detent for
headlight operation.
3
Multifunction Lever
Headlight Switch
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
With the engine running and the multifunction lever in
Turning the end of the multifunction lever to the third the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on and turn
detent (AUTO), will activate the automatic headlight off based on the surrounding light levels.
system.
Headlights With Wipers (Available With Automatic
Headlights Only)
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
Headlight Switch
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or
off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Headlight Time Delay
Turn Signals
There is also a feature that delays turning off the vehicle Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
lights for 30, 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
turned OFF. To activate the headlight delay, the multi- proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
function lever must be rotated to the off position after the
ignition switch is turned OFF. Only the headlights will
illuminate during this time. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Lights On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Turn Signal Control
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
Lane Change Assist
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-toTap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds for the next
three times then automatically turn off.
flash-to-pass operation.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you, to
switch the headlights back to low beam.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is on the multifunction
lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out
the end of the multifunction lever.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear
except PARK. This provides a constant lights on condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate
at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the parking brake
is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn
off.
Front Fog Light Operation
NOTE: The front fog lights will only operate with the
headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights
will turn off the front fog lights.
NOTE: If a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the
same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of
the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no
longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme
bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights
and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a
door is opened.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parking lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next
detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
the parking lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last
detent to turn on the interior lighting.
Dimmer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Map/Reading/Interior Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above
the rearview mirror. Each light can be turned on by
pressing the barrel. Press the barrel a second time to turn
the light off. Both of these lights can swivel so that the
light can be aimed at a specific spot, if desired. The lights
will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time,
so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the
vehicle. They will not turn off automatically. Interior
lighting also comes on when a door is opened or the
dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second
detent.
3
Map/Reading Lights
There is a second light located midway back in the
headliner.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
because a door is open. To restore interior light operation,
either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light
switch.
Battery Saver Feature
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch Rotate the end of the lever to the LO position for
on the control lever. The lever is located on the low-speed wiper operation, or to the HI position for
high-speed wiper operation.
right side of the steering column.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Changing Wiper Speeds
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the park
position if you turn the ignition switch OFF while they
are operating. The wipers will resume operation when
you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer control lever to the first detent, and
then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay
interval. There are five delay settings, which allow you to
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle Windshield Washers
every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/washer
between cycles.
control lever toward you and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the off position, the wipers will operate for two wipe
cycles and then turn off.
Changing Intermittent Settings
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use.
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single
wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from
Mist Control
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the
Headlights
With
Wipers
Feature
wipers will continue to operate.
(Available With Automatic Headlights Only)
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the multifunction lever (on the left side of the steering
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
column) is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the
headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if
they were turned on by this feature.
The headlights with wipers feature can be turned on or
off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Wheel
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, pull the control handle up until fully engaged.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
3
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the 2 — RES +
right side of the steering wheel.
3 — SET 4 — CANCEL
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate
To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.0 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.0 km/h).
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with- To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
out erasing the set speed memory.
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
To Resume Speed
will be established.
To Deactivate
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed (1.0 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.0 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
NOTE: Tap results of 1 mph or 1 km/h depends on
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- selection of US or METRIC units in the EVIC display
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button settings menu, or the RADIO settings menu (dependent
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to on vehicle configuration).
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
moderate hills is normal.
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorit may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
Control.
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
3
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN open and close the door. The name and color of the
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink® button may vary by manufacturer.
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN- Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door follow these steps:
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
not release the button.
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
activates, programming is complete.
steps.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to Programming A Non-Rolling Code
complete the training.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, before 1995.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
erase the channels.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
• To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink® To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
button you want to program and the hand-held trans- follow these steps:
mitter button.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
not release the button.
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programfrom slow to rapid.
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
remaining steps.
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to proFor programming transmitters in Canada/United States
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
view.
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transtransmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indito pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
fully trained.
time-out in the same manner.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door or gate motor.
door may open and close while you are programming.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- 3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
follow all remaining steps.
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, Using HomeLink®
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
To operate, press and release the programmed
erase the channels.
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operaprogramming, plug it back in at this time.
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
also be used at any time.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Security
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
in your vehicle.
remember to plug it back in?
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The sunroof controls are mounted between the dome/
reading lights.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatithe sunroof.
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open.” During Express Open operation, any movement
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
Opening Sunroof — Express
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Pinch Protect Feature
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
held rearward again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obClosing Sunroof — Express
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucsecond and the sunroof will close automatically from any tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt
will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect
disabled.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
The instrument panel power outlet, located below the
climate control knobs, has power available only when the
For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle
ignition is ON. This power outlet will also operate a
Information Center (EVIC)
conventional cigar lighter unit.
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
Ignition Off Operation
For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets
Instrument Panel Power Outlet
on this vehicle. Both of the power outlets are protected by NOTE: To preserve the heating element, do not hold the
a fuse.
lighter in the heating position.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A second power outlet is located inside the center con- NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® knob
sole.
and element must be used.
CAUTION!
Center Console Power Outlet
The center console power outlet is powered directly from
the battery (power available at all times). Items plugged
into this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #16 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
2 — #11 Fuse 15 A Blue Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER —
IF EQUIPPED
An optional ash receiver is available from your authorized dealer and will fit in the center console front
cupholder.
The optional ash receiver also comes with a cigar lighter
that can be used with the power outlets. Refer to “Power
Outlets” in “Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders located in the center console
for the front passengers.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
3
Front Cupholders
Rear Seat Bottle Holder
There are built-in bottle holders located in both rear door
trim panels.
Rear Bottle Holder
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
Opened Glove Compartment
CONSOLE FEATURES
Storage
Glove Compartment
Pull on the handle to open the glove compartment.
The center console is located between the front driver
and passenger seats. The center console armrest slides
forward from design position to provide added user
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
comfort. The center console can be used for storage and
is also equipped with an electrical power outlet. Refer to
“Power Outlets” in “Understanding The Feature of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
3
Center Console Storage
The top compartment holds small items, such as a pen
and note pad, while the larger bottom compartment will
hold CDs and alike. The bottom compartment also contains a 12 Volt power outlet. The console’s front opening
Center Console Armrest
Two separate storage compartments are also located lid allows for easy access to these compartments.
underneath the armrest.
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
CARGO AREA FEATURES
• A notch in the front of the console base allows for use The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
of a cellular phone while it is plugged into the power versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
outlet with the armrest latched down.
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
• The power outlet can also energize the cigar lighter in nearly flat extension of the load floor.
the optional cup holder ash receiver.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
WARNING!
seatback above the seat strap.
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
• The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in
personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading
your vehicle:
(Continued)
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put heavier
objects as low and as far forward as possible. Place as
much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle. Too much
weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the
rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
Ski Pass-Through
There is a ski pass-through door located behind the rear
seat armrest that allows longer items, such as snow skis,
to be stored in the rear cargo area. Lower the armrest and
pull downward on the latch to open the ski pass-through
door.
Ski Pass-Through
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button
to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ Oil Change Required — If Equipped . . . . . . .230
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ EVIC Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — R/T. . . . . . . . . . . .210
▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .211
▫ Average Fuel Economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
䡵 MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .225
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
▫ Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Tire PSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ EVIC Units Selection (UNITS IN Display) . . . .236
▫ System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
4
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Personal Settings
䡵 Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
(Customer-Programmable Features) . . . . . . . .237
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. .
䡵 Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/
▫ Operation Instructions —
HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . .
System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . .
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) .
䡵 Uconnect® 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .240
▫ Operation Instructions —
CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play. . . . .244
▫ Notes on Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
▫ Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode . . . .248
. . . . .249
. . . . .249
. . . . .255
. . . . .257
. . . . .260
. . . . .260
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Uconnect® Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ Connecting The iPod® Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media
(i.e., CD) Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .275
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . .271
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . . . . .275
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ Right-Hand Switch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
4
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
— Air Outlet
— Side Window Demister Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Passenger Airbag
Glove Compartment
Heated Seat Switch — If Equipped
Hazard Switch
9 — Power Outlet
10 — Climate Controls
11 — Ignition Switch
12 — Trunk Release Button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — R/T
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and
1. Temperature Gauge
the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera- as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
ture. Any reading below the red mark of the gauge shows from the engine cooling system.
that the engine cooling system is operating properly. The
2. Fuel Door Reminder
gauge pointer may show a higher than normal temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, in
This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is
heavy stop and go traffic, or when towing a trailer.
located on the left side of the vehicle.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
3. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, the
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
There are steps that you can take to slow down an 4. Speedometer
impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is Indicates the vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and
on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to kilometers per hour (km/h).
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
4
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Low Fuel Light
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
When the fuel level drops to approximately
2.0 gallons (7.6 Liters), the fuel symbol will light 7. Air Bag Warning Light
and a single chime will sound.
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
NOTE: This light will remain on until a minimum of
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
approximately 3.0 gallons of fuel is added.
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
6. Charging System Light
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
This light shows the status of the electrical charg- dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
ing system. The light should come on briefly in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly further information.
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while 8. Seat Belt Reminder Light
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s electrical devices,
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
such as the Front Fog Lights or Rear Window Defroster.
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
If the Charging System Light remains on, it means that
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See your local the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat
authorized dealer.
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light will
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant 10. Engine Temperature Warning Light
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
This light warns of an overheated engine condiVehicle” for further information.
tion. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
9. Oil Pressure Warning Light
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
light will come on and remain on when the ignition
pass H, and a continuous chime will occur until the
switch is turned from the OFF to the ON/RUN position,
engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes duration is
and the light will turn off after the engine is started. If the
expired, whichever come first.
bulb does not come on during starting, have the system
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
checked by an authorized dealer.
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vethe vehicle and shut off the engine. DO NOT OPERATE
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED.
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine. service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
This can be determined using the procedure shown in Do In Emergencies” for further information.
“Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
4
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
11. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair
to the ABS system is required.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi- approximately three seconds. The light should then turn
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light PARK.
inspected by an authorized dealer.
14. Odometer Display/Trip Odometer Display
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
The odometer display shows the total distance the veapplied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posihicle has been driven.
tion.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
12. Tachometer
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
The silver area of the scale shows the permissible engine as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range. then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
prevent engine damage.
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
13. Shift Lever Indicator
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
must be reset at zero.
automatic transmission.
4
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and
release the Trip Odometer button. To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odometer to be reset then
push and hold the button until the display resets (approximately two seconds). Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for additional information.
CHANgE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
HOTOIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Oil Temperature
Exceeds Safe Threshold
NOTE: If the instrument cluster is equipped with the
optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
then all warnings including ”Low Tire,” “Door Ajar” and
When the appropriate conditions exist, the odometer will “Trunk Ajar” will only display in the EVIC. (Refer to
display the following messages:
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for specific messages).
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar
LoW tirE
dECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk Ajar When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three
LoW tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure cycles.
Vehicle Odometer Messages
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
HOTOIL
the problem continues, the message will appear the next
time the vehicle is started. See your authorized dealer
service center as soon as possible.
When this message is displayed there is a engine oil
over-temperature condition. When this condition occurs,
the “HOTOIL” message will be displayed in the odom- CHANgE OIL
eter along with a chime.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL” message will flash
Emergencies”.
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
gASCAP
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
in the evaporative system, or the fuel filler cap is loose, engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
improperly installed, or damaged, the words “gASCAP” your personal driving style.
will display in the odometer display area. If this occurs,
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odomtime you turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.
eter reset button to turn off the “gASCAP” message.
To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
(Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System — OBDII” in
Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information). If
4
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the oil change indicator system (after performing the 15. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
scheduled maintenance) perform the following proceThis indicator shows that the Electronic Speed
dure:
Control System is ON.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do 16. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Button
not start the engine).
Trip Odometer
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly 3 times
Press and release this button to change the display from
within 10 seconds.
odometer to “Trip A.” Press and release it a second time
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
to change the display to “Trip B.” Press and release it a
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you third time to change the display back to the odometer.
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not To reset the trip odometer, first display the trip mileage
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
that you want to reset, “Trip A” or “Trip B.” Then push
4. For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle and hold the button (approximately two seconds) until
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle the display resets to 0 miles (km). The odometer must be
in Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer.
Information Center (EVIC)”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
17. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Indicator Light
18. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This light informs you of a problem with the
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. If the light remains
19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be
Light — If Equipped
drivable and not need towing, however see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control system (ESC) has been turned off by the
If the light is flashing when the engine is running you
driver.
may experience power loss, an elevated/rough idle, and
increased brake pedal effort, and your vehicle may 20. Turn Signal Indicators
require towing. Immediate service is required.
The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior
The light will come on when the ignition switch is first
turn signal, when using the turn signal lever. A
turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check. This is chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile
normal. If the light does not come on during starting, (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for
a defective outside light bulb.
4
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
problem diagnosed and corrected.
16 seconds when the alarm system is arming.
The light will begin to flash slowly indicating NOTE:
that the system is armed. The light will stop
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
flashing when the vehicle is disarmed.
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
21. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
22. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned
to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
23. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
24. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
tires.)
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
4
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
CAUTION!
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is The TPMS has been optimized for the original
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for warning have been established for the tire size
approximately one minute and then remain continuously equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operailluminated. This sequence will continue upon subse- tion or sensor damage may result when using requent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. placement equipment that is not of the same size,
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the 25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
monitors emissions, engine, and automatic transto continue to function properly.
mission control systems. The light will illuminate when
the key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
the bulb does not come on when turning the key from
LOCK to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
26. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light — If Equipped
This light monitors the ABS. This light will
come on when the ignition key is turned to the
ON/RUN position and may stay on for approximately three seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving,
it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required, however,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
4
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the
on.
light turns off.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock
Brakes.
The ABS warning light should be checked frequently to
assure that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key
to the on position, but do not start the vehicle. The light
should come on. If the light does not come on, have the
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
27. Transmission Temperature Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
28. High Beam Indicator
MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED
This light indicates that the headlights are on high The Mini-Trip Computer is located in the instrument
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer- cluster and features a driver-interactive trip information
and temperature display.
ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam.
29. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Dis- NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
play — If Equipped
be driven several minutes before the updated temperaThis display shows the EVIC messages when the approture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
priate conditions exist. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infordisplayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
mation Center (EVIC)” for further information.
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
4
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Buttons
STEP Button
Press the STEP button located on the steering wheel to
scroll through sub menus (i.e., Temperature, Trip Functions: Odometer, Trip A, Trip B).
RESET Button
To reset the display shown, turn the ignition switch to the
ON position, then press and hold the RESET button
located on the steering wheel.
The following displays can be reset or changed:
• Trip A
• Trip B
Mini-Trip Control Buttons
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Press and release the STEP button on the instrument cluster to switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip B.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
4
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
instrument cluster.
The EVIC consists of the following:
• Compass Heading Display (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE,
SW)
• Mileage (Avg/MPG)
• Miles To Empty
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Low Tire Information (Tire Pressure Monitor System The system allows the driver to select information by
(TPMS) Displays) — if equipped
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• Timer
• Units
• System Warnings (Door Ajar, etc.)
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Outside Temperature Display (°F or °C)
• Audio Mode Displays – 12 preset Radio Stations or CD
Title and Track number when playing
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
MENU Button
SELECT Button
Press and release the MENU button to advance
Press and release the SELECT Button to accept
a selection. The SELECT Button also resets
the display to each of the EVIC Main Menu
various Trip Functions.
features. Upon reaching the last item in the
Main Menu the EVIC will advance to the first
item in the Main Menu with the next MENU button press Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
and release.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
DOWN Button
the following messages:
Press and release the DOWN button to advance
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime
the display through the various Trip Functions
after one mile traveled)
or Personal Settings.
• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
COMPASS Button
• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
Press and release the COMPASS button to
display the compass heading, the outside tem- • Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
perature, and Audio Info (when the radio is on)
screen when the current screen is not the • Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
compass, outside temp, audio info screen.
4
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• RKE (Remote Keyless Entry) Battery Low (with a •
single chime)
•
• Personal Settings Not Avail – Vehicle Not In PARK
•
• Personal Settings Not Avail – Vehicle in Motion
•
• Door Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which door is
•
open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in
motion).
•
• Doors Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which doors
are open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in
motion).
• Trunk Open (with vehicle graphic showing an open
trunk and A single chime )
• Lights On
• Key In Ignition
• Remote start aborted — Door ajar
Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
Remote start aborted — Trunk ajar
Remote start aborted — Fuel low
Remote start disabled — System fault
Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
Low Tire (with a graphic of the car showing which
tire(s) is/are low - with a single chime and ⬙Inflate to
XX⬙). Refer to ⬙Tire Pressure Monitoring System⬙ in
⬙Starting and Operating⬙.
• Check TPM System (with a single chime) Refer to ⬙Tire
Pressure Monitoring System⬙ in ⬙Starting and Operating⬙.
Oil Change Required — If Equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
flash in the EVIC display for approximately five seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
EVIC Main Menu
To step to each main menu feature press and release the
MENU button once for each step. A step from the last
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
item in the list will cause the first item in the feature list
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
to be displayed. The following features are in the Main
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
menu:
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), • Compass
perform the following procedure:
• Outside Temperature
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
• Audio Information (if radio is on) display
start the engine.)
• Average Fuel Economy
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
• Distance to Empty
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
• Tire Pressure Status display
4
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Elapsed Time
Compass Display
• EVIC Units Selection
COMPASS Button
• System Status
The compass heading indicates the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
• Personal Settings
compass button to display one of eight compass headings, the outside temperature, and
NOTE: For features in the EVIC that can be reset (Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time), the EVIC prompts audio information (if the radio is on) if the EVIC display
a reset with a SELECT button graphic and the word is not already displaying this screen.
RESET next to it.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
When the SELECT button is pressed, the selected feature
will reset and RESET ALL will display next to the
SELECT button graphic. Pressing SELECT a second time
will reset both Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time.
After three seconds without pressing SELECT, RESET
ALL will return to RESET and only the selected feature
will have been reset.
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
Automatic Compass Calibration
Manual Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to calibrate the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the
EVIC will flash the “CAL” indicator until the compass is
calibrated. You may calibrate the compass by completing
one or more 360–degree turns (in an area free from large
metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate, and the
variance has been properly set, you may wish to manually recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the
compass:
1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order
to enter the EVIC Programming Menus.
2. Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and an 3. Press and release the DOWN button until “Calibrate
environment free from large metallic objects such as
Compass Yes” displays in the EVIC.
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
4. Press and release the SELECT button and the “CAL”
etc.
indicator will start flashing.
5. Drive the vehicle slowly (under 5 mph / 8 km/h),
completing one or more circles (in an area free from
large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” indicator
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
4
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate compass heading.
NOTE: Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as
cell phones, iPod’s, radar detectors, PDA’s and laptops)
should be kept away from the top of the instrument
Compass Variance Map
panel. This is where the compass module is located and
such devices may interfere and cause false compass To Change Compass Variance:
readings.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Leave the
shift lever in PARK.
2. Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
3. Press and release the DOWN button until “Compass Distance To Empty (DTE)
Variance” and the current Variance Value displays in Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the EVIC.
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
4. Press and release the SELECT button to increment the determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
Variance Value by one, (one button press per update), and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
until the proper variance zone is selected according to tank level. DTE cannot be reset.
the map.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
NOTE: The Variance Values will wrap around from 15 loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE display value.
back to 1. The Default Variance is Zone 8.
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy can be reset by pressing and
holding the SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC
display). Upon reset, the history information will be
erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel
average reading before the reset.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL”. This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display.
4
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire PSI
Elapsed Time
Press and release the MENU button until ⬙Tire PSI⬙ is Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
displayed.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is
in the RUN or START position.
Tire pressure information is displayed as follows:
Elapsed time is displayed as follows:
• If tire pressure is OK for all tires, TIRE and a vehicle
graphic are displayed with tire pressure values in each • Hours
corner or the graphic.
• Minutes
• If one or more tires have low pressure, LOW TIRE,
• Seconds
⬙Inflate to XX” and a vehicle graphic are displayed
with tire pressure values in each corner of the graphic. Elapsed time can be reset by pressing and holding the
Tire pressure values that are too low will be flashing. SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC display). Upon
reset all digits will change to zeros and time will start
• If the Tire Pressure System requires service, ⬙Check incrementing again if the ignition switch is in RUN or
TPM System⬙ is displayed. Tire PSI is an information START.
only function and cannot be reset.
EVIC Units Selection (UNITS IN Display)
Displays the units used for the Outside Temperature,
Average Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty and Tire
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
Pressure features. Press and Release the SELECT button Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
to toggle units between ⬙U.S.⬙ and ⬙METRIC⬙.
System Status
Displays SYSTEM OK if there are no active Warning
Messages stored. Pressing and releasing the DOWN
button when SYSTEM OK is displayed will do nothing.
Displays SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT if there are
active Warning Messages stored. Pressing and releasing
the DOWN button when SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT is displayed will display each stored warning for
each button press. Press and Release the MENU button to
return to the Main Menu.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Press and release the DOWN button to display the
following programmable features:
Language
When in this display you may select different languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
Pressing the SELECT button while in this display selects
English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, or Dutch depending on availability. As you continue, the displayed
information will be shown in the selected language.
Auto Unlock on Exit
When ON is selected and the transaxle is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position, all doors will unlock when the
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
driver’s door is opened. To make your selection, press the
features when the automatic transaxle is in PARK.
SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.
4
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RKE Unlock
Flash Lamp with Lock
When “Driver Door 1st Press” is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All Doors 1st Press” is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the SELECT button until “Driver Door
1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the Sound Horn on lock feature selected. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until ON or OFF appears.
Sound Horn with Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lamp with
Lock feature. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
the SELECT button until 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds appears.
Headlamps With Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press the SELECT button until ON or OFF
appears.
Illumin. Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime make your selection, press the SELECT button until
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the “OFF,” “30 sec,” “60 sec,” or “90 sec” appears.
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Display Units In
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
The EVIC and odometer can be changed between English
Key-Off Power Delay
and Metric units of measure. To make your selection,
When this feature is selected, the power window press and release the SELECT button until “U.S.” or
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone (if equipped), and “METRIC” appears.
power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes Compass Variance
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature. Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
To make your selection, press the SELECT button until Calibrate Compass
Off, 45 sec., 5 min., or 10 min. appears.
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
4
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect® 130
Refer to your Uconnect® 730N, 430 or 430N user’s
manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
If Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
Uconnect® 130
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second TIME Button
time to turn off the radio.
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 Clock Setting Procedure
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
SEEK Buttons
will begin to blink.
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL conto seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
trol knob to save time change.
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
4
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
RW/FF
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons mid-range tones.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
AM or FM frequencies.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
TUNE Control
treble tones.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
AM/FM Button
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
pressing the pushbutton twice.
SET/RND Button – To Set The Pushbutton
Memory
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
Buttons 1 - 6
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
4
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
NOTE:
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
to operate the radio.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
EJECT Button – Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
RW/FF
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
button works in a similar manner.
SEEK Button
AM/FM Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
4
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file norPress the right SEEK button to move to the next ranmally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
domly selected track.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
• Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file • Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
recording media and formats are limited. When writing
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
Supported Media (Disc Types)
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
4
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
supported.
before writing to the disc.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or iPod®, and utilize the vehicle’s audio
time to start playing the MP3 files.
system to amplify the source and play through the
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
vehicle speakers.
by the following:
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
4
Uconnect® 130
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
time to turn off the radio.
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Electronic Volume Control
Voice Command Button Uconnect® Phone —
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 If Equipped
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” for further
volume, and to the left decreases it.
details.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
set at the same volume level as last played.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
SEEK Buttons
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next screen.
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch TIME Button
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
and radio frequency.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
procedure, starting at Step 2.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
INFO Button
SCROLL control knob.
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
will begin to blink.
RW/FF
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL con- Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
trol knob to save time change.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds. AM or FM frequencies.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. TUNE Control
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
4
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the MUSIC TYPE Button
mid-range tones.
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
treble tones.
Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or
undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Program Type
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
4
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL conBy pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
trol knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
save time change.
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
AM/FM Button
mode.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be SET/RND Button – To Set The Pushbutton
Memory
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
Buttons 1 - 6
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
button number will display.
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
stations).
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
DISC/AUX Button
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
4
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio EJECT Button – Ejecting a CD
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
SEEK Button
AM/FM Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
TIME Button
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
RW/FF
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricworks in a similar manner.
tions.
4
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
• Maximum number of files: 255
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
Layer
3
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
VBR bit rates.
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
by the following:
playable files).
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than The folder list will time out after five seconds.
CD-R media
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
to load than non-multisession discs
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will Name, and Folder Name (if available).
increase with more files and folders
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time⬙ priority mode.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions – Auxiliary Mode
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
MP3 player or iPod® and utilize the vehicle’s audio If Equipped
system to amplify the source and play through the Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
vehicle speakers.
Uconnect® Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil- If Equipped
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcastNOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume sports, news, entertainment, and programming for childown.
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
4
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
System Activation
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
ESN/SID Access
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect® Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
Please have the following information available when
mode.
calling:
Satellite Antenna
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
Number (ESN/SID).
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as Operating Instructions - Uconnect® Multimedia
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within (Satellite) Mode
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
on or above the antenna.
ACC position to operate the radio.
Reception Quality
SEEK Buttons
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
following reasons:
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
structure or under a physical obstacle.
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
without stopping until you release it.
form of short audio mutes.
SCAN Button
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
cause intermittent reception.
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
cause signal blockage.
button a second time.
4
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
RW/FF
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
direction of the arrows.
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel. exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set The Pushbutton Memory
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to button number will display.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. Buttons 1 - 6
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but- iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
stored into pushbutton memory.
plugged into the USB port, located in the center of the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
4
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect® Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
iPod® or external USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod® or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod® /MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
USB Connector Port
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicle’s iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or
Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which is
pressing radio switches, as described below.
located in the center of the instrument panel below the
climate controls.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To get into the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode and
access a connected audio device, either press the “AUX”
button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and
say ⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB.⬙ Once in the iPod®/USB/
Using This Feature
MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
By using an iPod® cable, or an external USB device to
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
connect to the USB port:
Play Mode
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album, When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod® or external USB device automatically starts Play
etc.) information on the radio display.
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod® or external
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod® contents. USB device and display data:
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into • Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
previous track.
audio device).
4
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the VR
button and say ⬙Next Track.⬙
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
Track.⬙
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click, • While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
will jump to the previous track in the list or press the
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
VR button and say ⬙Previous Track.⬙
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
long enough will jump to the beginning of the current
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
track.
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
holding the FF>> button.
Off.⬙
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod®/USB/MP3 dejump backward or forward respectively, for five secvice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of
onds.
each track in the current list and then forward to the
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the • Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise
(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previous
track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be
and next tracks.
played is highlighted on the radio display, press the
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
TUNE control knob to select and start playing the
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod® or external USB
through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
in updating the information on the radio display may
⬙Shuffle Off.⬙ If the RND icon is showing on the radio
be noticeable.
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
• During all List modes, the iPod® displays all lists in
List Or Browse Mode
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom of
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterclockbelow, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
wise) to get to the track faster.
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
audio device.
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod® or exter• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
nal USB device:
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
• Preset 1 – Playlists
device or external USB device.
4
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list
on the top line and the first item in that list on the
second line.
• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod® or external USB device.
• Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item
to be selected and press the TUNE control knob. This
will display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod® or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod® or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s
guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod® or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod® or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA)
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect®
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect® phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.
Selecting A Different Audio Device
1. Press the PHONE button to begin.
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the 2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and following the beep, say
Uconnect® phone system.
⬙Setup⬙, then say ⬙Select Audio Devices.⬙
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Uconnect® phone system to list the audio devices.
To enter BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on the
radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth Stream- Next Track
ing Audio.”
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
Play Mode
radio and say “Next Track,” to jump to the next music
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can track on your cellular phone.
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Previous Track
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on IF EQUIPPED
the radio and say “Previous Track,” to jump to the
previous music track on your cellular phone.
Browse
Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth® Streaming
Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current song that is
playing will display info.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear Right-Hand Switch Functions
surface of the steering wheel, at the three and nine
• Press the top of the switch to increase the volume.
o’clock positions.
• Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume.
The right-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the
center, and controls the volume and mode of the sound • Press the button in the center of the switch to change
modes (i.e., AM, FM, etc.).
system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase
the volume. Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will
Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio Operation
decrease the volume. Pressing the center button changes
the operation of the radio from AM to FM, or to CD • Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable
station up from the current setting.
mode, depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
The left-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the • Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next
listenable station down from the current setting.
center. The function of the left-hand switch is different,
depending on which mode you are in.
• Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to
the next preset that you have programmed.
The following describes the left-hand rocker switch operation in each mode.
4
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media (i.e., CD)
Operation
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
• Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next precautions:
track.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
• Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to
the beginning of the current track or to listen to the
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
wiping from center to edge.
seconds after the current track begins to play.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch• Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the
ing the disc.
second track, three times to listen to the third track,
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
and so forth.
or anti-static sprays.
• Press the button located in the center of the switch to
change to the next preset that you have programmed. 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
4
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
Manual Temperature Control
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of Temperature Control
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures, while rotating
right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
Rotate this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(OFF) position. There are four blower NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower
speeds.
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
position.
reducing air conditioning performance.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to engage the Air
Conditioning. A light will illuminate
when the Air Conditioning system is
engaged. Rotating the dial left into the
blue area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures, while rotating right into
the red area indicates warmer
temperatures.
• ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
select Panel, Bi-Level or Floor mode and move the
temperature control to the desired temperature.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of air distribution. You
can select either a primary mode as
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
identified by the symbols on the conuntil the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
trol, or a blend of two of these modes.
• MAX A/C
The closer the setting is to a particular
symbol, the more air distribution you
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
receive from that mode.
buttons at the same time.
4
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Panel
• Floor
Air is directed through the outlets in the instruAir is directed through the floor outlets with a
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
small amount flowing through the defrost and
airflow.
side window demist outlets.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed • Mix
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
for maximum airflow to the rear.
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
• Bi-Level
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
• Defrost
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
Air is directed through the windshield and side
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxilower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but mum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.
cool conditions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix, • The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehuthe outside air position for maximum defogging.
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
• The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
• Recirculation Control
when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode
control is set to panel or Bi-Level.
Pressing the Recirculation Control button will
temporarily put the system in recirculation • Recirculated air is not allowed in Defrost modes. If the
mode. This can be used when outside condiRecirculation button is pressed while in Defrost mode,
tions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
the LED indicator will flash several times then go out.
humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause
Recirculation will be disabled automatically when
the LED in the control button to illuminate.
Defrost mode is selected.
NOTE:
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
4
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
Automatic Operation
The Automatic Temperature Control system automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at
the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
Operation of the system is quite simple.
1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the
Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat
occupants only.
Automatic Temperature Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Dial in the temperature you would NOTE:
like the system to maintain by rotating
• The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
the Temperature Control knob. Once
without affecting automatic operation.
the comfort level is selected, the system will maintain that level automati- • Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
cally using the heating system. Should
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
the desired comfort level require air
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
conditioning, the system will automatically make the
adjustment.
air conditioning is not necessary.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply • If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the
in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
system completely and closes the outside air intake.
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.
reducing air conditioning performance.
4
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• While operating in AUTO, the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the
windshield. The defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
This system offers a full complement of manual override Operation Chart that follows for details.
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
Manual Operation
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control is a difference in temperature between the upper and
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
• Panel
cool conditions.
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru• Floor
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
airflow.
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
side window demist outlets.
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
• Mix
• Bi-Level
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
• Defrost
• Recirculation Control
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.
The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pressing the Recirculation
Control button will temporarily put the system
in recirculation mode. This can be used when
outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
• Air Conditioner Control
humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause
Press this button to turn on the air the LED in the control button to illuminate.
conditioning during manual operation
NOTE:
only. When the air conditioning is
turned on, cool dehumidified air will • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
flow through the outlets selected with
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
the Mode control dial. Press this button a second time to turn OFF the air • In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
mode is not allowed in defrost, in order to improve
manual compressor operation is selected.
window clearing. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if Defrost is selected.
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
move the Mode knob to Panel, Mix and then press the
Recirculation button. This feature reduces the possibilpress the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
ity of window fogging.
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper
Blower Control
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
Recirculation to be selected while in defrost. AttemptFor full automatic operation or for
ing to use the recirculation while in Defrost will cause
automatic blower operation, turn the
the LED in the control button to blink and then turn
blower knob to the AUTO position. In
off.
manual mode there are seven blower
• Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you
speeds that can be individual selected.
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
In off position the blower will shut off.
Mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However,
under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode, Operating Tips
the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When
these conditions are present, and the Recirculation NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn suggested control settings for various weather condioff. This tells you that you are unable to go into tions.
Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
Summer Operation
Vacation Storage
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Mix
Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and
is not recommended because it may cause window provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging befogging.
comes a problem, increase blower speed. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid
weather.
Winter Operation
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods as fogging may occur.
4
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Side Window Demisters
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from
entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service
information or see your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for filter service intervals.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .302
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
▫ Four-Speed Automatic Transmission —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .299
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
(62TE) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
䡵 AUTOSTICK® — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .318
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .319
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
5
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
䡵 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) . . . . . . . . .327
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .330
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .332
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . .334
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .341
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .342
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .347
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .350
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .371
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .359
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .359
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .360 䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . .374
. . . . .374
. . . . .375
. . . . .375
5
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . .376
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
▫ Loose Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .381
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .394
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .381
▫ Recreational Towing — All Models . . . . . . . . .395
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
5
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
For vehicles not equipped with Tip Start (Four-Speed
Transmission), turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it when the engine starts. If the
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
For vehicles equipped with Tip Start (Six-Speed Transmission), turn the ignition switch to the START position
and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter
motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in
10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Without Tip Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the
engine. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded.
5
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine is flooded, it may start to run, but not have
enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking up to 15
seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to
the floor.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, repeat the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures.
With Tip Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds
before trying again.
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
CAUTION!
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
hour to have an adequate warning effect on the engine.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood
a complete stop.
between the headlight assembly and the Totally Inte- • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
grated Power Module (Fuse Box) on the driver’s side of
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
the vehicle.
idle speed.
(Continued)
5
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed.
If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.
Once the key is removed, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK
5
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
position. The key can only be removed from the ignition Four-Speed Automatic Transmission —
when the ignition is in the LOCK position, and once If Equipped
removed, the transmission is locked in PARK.
The transmission gear position display (located in the
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
key in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interstopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain lock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
service.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
pedal must be pressed.
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to grade.
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
WARNING!
Gear Ranges
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.
Once the key is removed, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key and lock your vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
5
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to second gear only. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a
suitable level.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), select the ⬙3⬙ range. Under
these conditions, using the ⬙3⬙ range will improve perforDRIVE 3 (3)
mance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
This range eliminates shifts into fourth gear. The transmission will operate normally in first and second gear.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operatShifts into third may be delayed to provide second gear
ing limits, the powertrain controller will modify the
operation at higher speeds. Using the ⬙3⬙ range while
DRIVE and “3” range shift points. This is done to prevent
operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions
transmission damage due to overheating.
5
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
will improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up. The ⬙3⬙
range should also be used when descending steep grades
to avoid brake system distress.
LOW (L)
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
Use this range for engine braking when descending very
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
steep grades. In this range, the transmission will downfollowing steps:
shift for maximum engine braking, and upshifts will
occur only to prevent engine overspeed.
1. Stop the vehicle.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains 5. Restart the engine.
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom- • The engine coolant has reached an adequate temperamend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
ture.
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer Torque Converter Clutch
service is required.
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
Overdrive Operation
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatiThe automatic transmission includes an electronically
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
controlled Overdrive (fourth gear). The transmission will
different feeling or response during normal operation in
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conthe upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
ditions are present:
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
• The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature.
5
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
Shifting between the DRIVE and 3 ranges, when the
transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that
the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (62TE) —
If Equipped
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever
out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick® shift positions. Manual
shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift control
(refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further information). Moving the shift lever into the AutoStick® position
(below the Drive position) activates AutoStick® mode,
providing manual shift control and displaying the current gear in the instrument cluster.
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
Shift Lever
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffiGear Ranges
cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to grade.
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
5
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.
Once the key is removed, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key and lock your vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posiperiods with the engine running. The engine may be
tion:
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift
control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
5
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to third gear only. Normal operation will resume
once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could 5. Restart the engine.
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom- • The engine coolant has reached an adequate temperamend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
ture.
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
• The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer Torque Converter Clutch
service is required.
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
Overdrive Operation
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatiThe automatic transmission includes an electronically
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will
different feeling or response during normal operation in
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conthe upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
ditions are present:
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
• The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem- the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
(usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because
perature.
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
5
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
Using the AutoStick® shift control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the
transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
gear being used. Moving the shift lever to the left (-)
triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift. The
current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right
AUTOSTICK® — IF EQUIPPED
(+) or left (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed
AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear
providing manual shift control, giving you more control until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as
of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize en- described below.
gine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This • The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
system can also provide you with more control during
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain
vehicle is accelerated.
driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
• You can start out, from a stop, in any gear except top
Operation
gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in
When the shift lever is in the AutoStick® position (below
second gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in
the DRIVE position), it can be moved from side to side.
snowy or icy conditions.
This allows the driver to manually select the transmission
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
• The transmission will automatically upshift when nec- AutoStick® position at any time without taking your foot
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
off the accelerator pedal.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is engaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick® is engaged.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
• If the system detects powertrain overheating, the DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
transmission will revert to automatic shift mode and Acceleration
remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip• If the system detects a problem, it will disable pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
AutoStick® mode and the transmission will return to erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
To disengage AutoStick® mode, return the shift lever to the front (driving) wheels.
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the
5
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Driving through water more than a few inches/
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
5
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it Power Steering Fluid Check
does not in any way damage the steering system.
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
5
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici- If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho- level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
rized dealer.
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
Parking Brake
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
5
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate the hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
WARNING!
• Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
5
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will
come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb
repaired as soon as possible.
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” remain on, the Anti-Lock Brake
(ABS) and Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required. See your authorized dealer.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related
motor noises. These noises are the system performing its
self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working
properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is
started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into anti-lock:
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
• Brake pedal pulsations.
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end accurate signals for the computer.
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
5
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist
System (BAS), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions and are commonly
referred to as ESC.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
Traction Control System (TCS)
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section of this manual.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
5
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the oversteer or understeer condition.
• Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes:
intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand,
or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC
would normally allow is required to gain traction.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for almost all driving situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” for
specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch (located in the lower switch bank below the
heater/air conditioning controls). When in “Partial Off”
mode, the TCS portion of ESC, except for the limited slip
ESC Off Switch
feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will be illuminated. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off”
All other stability features of ESC function normally, with switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of
the exception of engine power reduction. This mode is operation.
5
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC on again by momentarily
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo- • Each time the ignition is cycled ON, the ESC system
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
will be ON even if it was cycled off previously.
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acthat caused the ESC activation.
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
NOTE:
off.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
5
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
NOTE:
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
5
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
5
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
B-Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information
Placard
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
Tire And Loading Information Placard
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
5
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuaxles must not be exceeded. For further information on
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).
5
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tire Inflation Pressures
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month:
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
may look properly inflated even when they are under- of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated.
temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always outside temperature condition.
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
5
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original combine them with other types of tires.
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatTire Repair
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm).
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
additional information.
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. For more information, contact a auservice description (Load Index and Speed Code).
thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all
Tire Types
season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
All Season Tires — If Equipped
the tire sidewall.
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
5
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
tire inflation pressures.
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid mode.
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be See the tire pressure monitoring section for more inforpoorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- mation.
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a
tire rotation pattern.
spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” in “What To Do
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
In Emergencies” for further information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipwheel equivalent in look and function to the original
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
5
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the Tire Spinning
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
first opportunity.
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopWARNING!
ping.
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
5
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
replaced.
to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information.
Tread Wear Indicators
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
Replacement Tires
those of the original wheels.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
5
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
are not recommended.
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
CAUTION!
smooth, quiet ride.
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
used.
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
5
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres- to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informasure.
tion.
The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
warning limit for any reason, including low temperature cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recompressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire
mended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle
warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illumimay cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
nates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recom27 psi (186 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
mended cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire
Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only
system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure
after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the system
cold placard pressure value.
5
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
(Continued)
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
the tire.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
Base System
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a ⬙LOW
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
TIRE⬙ message will be displayed for a minimum
of five seconds and a chime will sound when tire
5
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
tires. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be displayed.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
message. Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically update and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” and ⬙LOW
TIRE⬙ message will turn off. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when
a system fault is detected. The system fault will also
sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
remain on solid.
will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnthe TPMS will update automatically and the “Tire
ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as
sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
long no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warnLight” will turn ON and a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will
ing limit in any of the four active road tires. The
be displayed for a minimum of five seconds. An
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be displayed.
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid.
NOTE:
5
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
Center (EVIC)
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
readings to the Receiver Module.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
and to maintain the proper pressure.
more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with
• Receiver Module
the low tire pressure values flashing. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
message will also be displayed.
Premium System — If Equipped
• Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
wheel-wells)
and inflate all tires with low pressure (those flashing in
the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
placard pressure value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
message. Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically update, the
graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing, and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
Check TPMS Warning
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
When a system fault is detected, a chime will sound and
that affects radio wave signals.
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
housings.
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
indicate which sensor is not being received.
The EVIC will also display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
5
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
chime will sound, and the EVIC will still display a
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ mesflashing pressure value and the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message in the graphic display.
sage is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
values are still being received from the TPM sensors but
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
they may not be located in the correct vehicle position.
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
The system still needs to be serviced as long as the
then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will
⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
NOTE:
in place of the pressure value.
1. The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not have
a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
solid, and the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnSYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the “Tire
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain ON, a
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn following licenses:
OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new
KR5S18002015B
pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire United States
pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in Canada
267T-S180015B
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph FUEL REQUIREMENTS
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel
General Information
economy and performance when using
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
having an octane rating of 87. The use of
following conditions:
premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
including interference that may cause undesired op- your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
eration.
5
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
Problems that result from using gasoline containing To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol E-85 perform the following:
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Change the engine oil and oil filter.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso- • Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory.
line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
Warranty.
exposure to E-85 fuel.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
• Operate in a lean mode.
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
• Poor engine performance.
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
5
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content Fuel System Cautions
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
CAUTION!
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
and California reformulated gasoline.
performance:
Materials Added To Fuel
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perforAll gasoline sold in the United States is required to
mance and damage the emissions control system.
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
•
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
fuel.
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) —
IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
E-85 Fuel Cap
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
E-85 Badge
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternatE-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recom15% unleaded gasoline.
mended.
5
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
• You do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling.
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
• You drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
least 5 miles (8 km).
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
during warm up.
in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
NOTE:
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
hard starting and rough idle following start up even if contains additional requirements, developed during exthe above recommendations are followed, especially tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
Starting
Replacement Parts
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
CAUTION!
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable
over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle’s
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left rear surface.
quarter panel of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Tether Cable
Fuel Filler Door
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
NOTE: If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and doing so may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
5
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loose Filler Cap Message
The label contains the following information:
If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a “clicking” sound is
heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened. Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off
the message. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might
indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice
in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the
problem will turn the MIL off.
• Name of manufacturer
VEHICLE LOADING
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Overloading
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
it is not over the GVWR.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
rear GAWR.
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
WARNING!
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
5
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as Common Towing Definitions
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
you in understanding the following information:
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
the brakes operate.
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
Loading
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
In this section you will find safety tips and information further information.
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
review this information to tow your load as efficiently The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
and safely as possible.
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
TRAILER TOWING
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
Tongue Weight (TW)
and trailer when weighed in combination.
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
part of the load on your vehicle.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front
or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certi- Frontal Area
fication Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
information.
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
5
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Class
Class
Class
Class
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
2.4L/Auto
3.6L/Auto
Max. Frontal Area
Max. Gross Trailer Wt.
(GTW)
1,000 lbs (450 kg)
11 sq.ft. (1.0 sq.m)
(See Note 2)
22 sq.ft. (2.0 sq.m)
1,000 lbs (450 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Note 1: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo,
and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire
Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
(See Note 1)
100 lbs (45 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
Note 2: Enclosed trailers or open utility trailers with
front shields/guards are not recommended for use with
all four-cylinder engines with automatic transmission.
Please see your authorized dealer for additional information.
5
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
WARNING!
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
(Continued)
5
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
(Continued)
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard.
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and OperThis could cause inadequate braking and possible
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
personal injury.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
sures before trailer usage.
required when towing a trailer with electronically
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
brake controller is not required.
proper inspection procedure.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for the proper tire
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
5
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
(Continued)
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle,
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
5
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
If you REGULARLY TOW a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the autoBefore setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
matic transmission fluid and filter as specified for “poand backing up the trailer in an area located away from
lice, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to the
heavy traffic.
“Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance
Automatic Transmission
intervals.
Towing Tips
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, select the
⬙3⬙ range (with four-speed transmission) or select a lower
gear using the AutoStick® shift control (with six-speed
transmission).
NOTE: Check the transmission fluid level (four-speed
transmission only) before towing. The six-speed transmission does not require a fluid level check before
towing. If, however, you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, see your authorized dealer immediNOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle ately for assistance.
under heavy loading conditions, will improve perfor- AutoStick®
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces– When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the
sive shifting and heat build-up. This action will also
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
provide better engine braking.
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “4” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or
“2” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
– To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Cooling System
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
Highway Driving
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until Reduce speed.
you can get back to cruising speed.
Air Conditioning
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
Turn off temporarily.
maximize fuel efficiency.
5
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
All Models
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
Recreational Towing — All Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
▫ Engine Oil Overheating (2.4L Engine Only) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .401
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
6
398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel, below the radio.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — Slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
CAUTION!
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle,
when safe. Turn the air conditioner off and wait until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. After
appropriate action has been taken, if the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately,
and call for service.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down Engine Oil Overheating (2.4L Engine Only) —
an impending overheat condition:
If Equipped
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C During sustained high-speed driving or trailer tow up
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and long grades on a hot day, the engine oil temperature may
become too hot. If this happens, the “HOTOIL” message
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
flashes in the odometer and the vehicle speed will be
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum reduced to 53 mph (85 km/h) until the engine oil
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control temperature is reduced.
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat NOTE: The vehicle speed is reduced to a maximum of
53 mph (85 km/h). You may of course, reduce your
from the engine cooling system.
vehicle speed further if needed.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
6
400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
100 Ft-Lbs
(135 N·m)
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
M12 x 1.25
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
19 mm
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
6
402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Spare Tire Stowage
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor
in the trunk.
Spare Tire Removal
Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor
in the trunk.
Spare Tire And Jack Storage
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left
rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
6
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
(Continued)
404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
(Continued)
Jack Warning Label
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
NOTE: Refer to the “Spare Tire” section of “Tires —
General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for
information about the spare tire, its use, and operation.
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the
left to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench
from the jack assembly.
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
points holds the jack handle in place.
6
Removing Jack Handle From Jack
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in step 3.
3. There is a front and rear jacking location on each side
of the vehicle. The plastic trim has been cut away to
expose the jacking locations on the body.
Front Jacking Location
Jacking Locations
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 407
6
Rear Jacking Location
4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the
jack head is properly engaged to the jacking location
on the wheel to be changed. Do not raise the vehicle
until you are sure the jack is securely engaged.
Jack Engaged (Front Jacking Location)
408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until
the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
6. Remove the wheel nuts, and pull the wheel and wheel
covers (where applicable) off the hub. Install the spare
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
CAUTION!
Jack Engaged (Rear Jacking Location)
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 409
WARNING!
• To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning
may result in personal injury.
• To avoid possible personal injury, handle the
wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any
sharp edges.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
Mounting Spare Tire
8. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
while at the end of the handle for increased leverage.
Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has
been tightened twice. For the correct lug nut torque
refer to Torque Specifications in this section. If you
doubt that you have tightened the nuts correctly, have
them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
6
410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
9. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is Road Tire Installation
free. Release the parking brake before driving the
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
vehicle. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the 1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
assembly using the means provided.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting
WARNING!
studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install
the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
WARNING!
the places provided.
10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area and have
the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
11. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
the tire pressure as required.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 411
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use
a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
WARNING!
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6
412 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
WARNING!
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this sec- has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
tion. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them result in personal injury.
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
dealer or service station.
handle counterclockwise.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly 4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
seated against the wheel.
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug
nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this sec1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
tion. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
dealer or service station.
lug nuts.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 413
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
6
414 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located between the left
front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash
shield. To allow jump-starting there are remote battery
posts located on the left side of the engine compartment.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 415
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. To remove the cover, press the locking
tab and pull upward on the cover.
6
Locking Tab
416 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 417
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode and could
result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground
point, do not use any other exposed metal parts.
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then 5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle,
you should have the battery and charging system in6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
spected at your authorized dealer.
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6
418 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels, or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
and REVERSE, while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 419
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
6
420 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Remove the rubber cupholder liner. Squeeze one side 7. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
of the liner’s center to expose its edge and facilitate
8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
removal.
9. Reinstall the cupholder liner.
4. Turn the ignition to the ACC or ON/RUN position,
but do not start the engine.
5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
6. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access hole
(at the front of the cupholder) and push and hold the
override release lever forward.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 421
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
Rear
Flatbed
Front
ALL
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
All Models
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h) max speed
• 15 mi (24 km) max distance
OK
BEST METHOD
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If your vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to ⬙Shift
Lever Override⬙ in this section for instructions on shifting
the transmission out of PARK for towing.
6
422 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Damage to the fascia will occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 mi (24 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 mi (24 km), it must be towed with the front wheels
OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, towing dolly, or
wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 mi (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can
cause severe transmission damage. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 423
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. Flatbed
towing is the preferred towing method. However, if a
flatbed towing vehicle is not available, wheel lift towing
equipment may be used. Rear towing (with the front
wheels on the ground) is not allowed, as transmission
damage will occur. If rear towing is the only alternative,
the front wheels must be placed on a towing dolly. Proper
towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .428
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .429
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
▫ A/C Air Filter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .440
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
7
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
▫ Headlamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ Appearance Care And Protection
From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Cleaning Center Console Cupholders. . . . . . . .464
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND
GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
7
1
2
3
4
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
5
6
7
8
— Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
— Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Engine Oil Fill
9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
10 — Engine Oil Dipstick
11 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
5
6
7
8
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or
improperly installed. A “gASCAP” message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until
a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer
“Reset” button to turn off the message. If the problem
7
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass do the following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
not crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not start this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing.
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
of a normal bulb check.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainteIf your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was Limited Warranty.
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personsystem to update. A recheck with the above test routine nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
7
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
available which include detailed service information for MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
attempting any procedure yourself.
services determined by the engineers who designed your
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
penalties being assessed against you.
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. Either the range markings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a
crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the
range and MAX at the high end of the range. Adding one
quart of oil when the reading is at the low end of the
range marking will raise the oil level to the high end of
the range marking.
7
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill
cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
months, whichever occurs first.
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil® Helix® or equivalent. is recommended for all operating
or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating tem- temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
peratures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Comthe engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Com- partment” illustration in this section.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 2.4L Engine
partment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to
information.
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®,
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
7
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomyour area.
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes Engine Oil Filter
are followed.
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
Materials Added To Engine Oil
at every engine oil change.
Synthetic Engine Oils
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and filter and are recommended.
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, Engine Air Cleaner Filter
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
maintenance intervals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment behind
the left front fender and is accessible without removing
the tire and wheel. Remote battery terminals are located
in the engine compartment for jump-starting. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the
right and remove the inner fender shield.
7
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
7
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The A/C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro- the glove box. Perform the following procedure to recarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental place the filter:
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- 1. Open the glove box and remove all contents.
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other 2. Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the
door.
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system 3. Disconnect the glove box door dampener from the slot
on the side of the box. This is done by grasping the
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
dampener connector (on the outside of the box) and
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
the end of the connector pin (on the inside of the box)
with your thumb and forefinger and pulling outward
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
while lightly lifting upward on the door with your
maintenance intervals.
other hand. Once disconnected, the dampener will
retract underneath the instrument panel if you reWARNING!
lease it.
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
4. Pivot the glove box downward.
operating or personal injury may result.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
5. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter 7. Install the A/C Air Filter with the arrow on the filter
cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover.
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to install the filter properly will result in the need to
replace it more often.
8. Reinstall the glove box door dampener and glove box.
Body Lubrication
A/C Air Filter Replacement
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
6. Remove the A/C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
the housing.
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
7
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perforThe external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Adding Washer Fluid
Windshield Wiper Blades
The windshield washer and the rear window washer
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulafluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
tions of salt or road film.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator Exhaust System
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
flush out the residual water.
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some system.
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
7
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
7
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Coolant Checks
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at anytime the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS12106).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
7
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material StanYour vehicle has been built with an improved engine
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concencoolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
Adding Coolant
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion- • Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recomized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as
engine cooling system.
possible.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing ac- Cooling System Pressure Cap
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
the vehicle is operated.
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
NOTE:
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
7
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
Four-Cylinder Engines — the coolant bottle provides a
quick visual method for determining that the engine
coolant (antifreeze) level is adequate. With the engine
idling and warm to normal operating temperature, the
level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle
should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines, shown
on the bottle.
Six-Cylinder Engines — the level of the engine coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is (antifreeze) in the pressurized coolant bottle should be
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check between the “COLD” and “FULL” range on the bottle
with your local authorities to determine the disposal when the engine is cold.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
for leaks.
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MShumidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion protecized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
tion of your engine which contains aluminum compocoolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
nents.
7
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emisCheck the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
sions.
if the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when persystem components should be inspected periodically. forming underhood services.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up
to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
7
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Special Additives
Fluid Level Check — Four-Speed Transmission
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
Use the following procedure to check the transmission
any special additives in the transmission.
fluid level properly:
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi- 2. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
this procedure.
7
456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake 7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert it until seated.
pedal.
Then, remove the dipstick and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posiis a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
tion (allowing time for the transmission to fully enNote that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid
gage in each position), ending with the transmission in
if the actual level is at or above the hole.
PARK.
• If the fluid is hot, the fluid level should be in the
5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to prevent dirt
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upfrom entering the transmission.
per two holes in the dipstick).
•
If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.”
or cold. Hot fluid is approximately 180° F (82° C),
which is the normal operating temperature after the If the fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick
vehicle is driven at least 15 miles (24 km). Hot fluid tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. After
cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips. adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait
Cold fluid is at a temperature of approximately 80° F at least two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the
(27° C).
transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
8. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission Fluid Level Check — Six-Speed Transmission
after checking or replenishing fluid, make sure that the The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
dipstick cap is properly reseated.
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
CAUTION!
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder, and will require more frequent
fluid and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid
specifications.
• Dirt and water in the transmission can cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing
fluid, make sure that the dipstick cap is re-seated
properly.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is
provided. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using a special service dipstick. If you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit
your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with
an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission
damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
7
458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
Refer to the ⬙Maintenance Schedule⬙ for the proper
resistance built into your vehicle.
maintenance intervals. In addition, change the fluid and
filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), What Causes Corrosion?
or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Special Care
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
a month.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
7
460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
considered the responsibility of the owner.
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
packaged and sealed.
Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
Cleaning Headlights
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break- • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
age than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
7
462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent to
clean vinyl upholstery
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of Cleaning Leather Upholstery
protectants on Stain Repel products.
MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products, which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Cleaning Interior Trim
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent, then MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Glass Surfaces
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear wincleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
rag.
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
scratch the elements.
7
464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Maintenance
Cleaning
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
Let soak for approximately one hour. After one hour pull
the liner from the water and dip it back into the water
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a
about six times. This will loosen any remaining debris.
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water.
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer
cloth.
surfaces with a clean soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
Installation
buckles do not work properly.
Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly.
Cleaning Center Console Cupholders
Removal
Grab the rubber portion of the cupholder and lift upward.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465
FUSES
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result
in serious personal injury, fire and/or property
damage.
(Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
7
466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Integrated Power Module
The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center
contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A label that
identifies each component may be printed on the inside
of the cover. Refer to the graphic below for FUSES/TIPM
location.
Integrated Power Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467
2
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
—
3
—
4
—
5
—
6
—
Cavity
1
Mini
Fuse
—
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Description
Cavity
Power Top Module
– If Equipped
Brake Vacuum
Pump
Center High
Mounted Stop
Light (CHMSL)/
Brake Switch
Ignition Switch
7
Cartridge
Fuse
—
8
—
9
40 Amp
Green
10
—
20 Amp
Yellow
11
—
15 Amp
Lt Blue
12
—
20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow –
If Equipped
Power Mirror
Switch/Climate
Controls
Mini
Fuse
30 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Green
Description
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) Sense 1
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) Sense 2
Battery Feed –
Power Seats –
If Equipped
Instrument Panel/
Power Locks/
Interior Lights
Selectable Power
Outlet (Inside
Center Arm Rest)
Spare
7
468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
13
Cartridge
Fuse
—
14
—
15
16
40 Amp
Green
—
17
—
Cavity
18
40 Amp
Green
Mini
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
—
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
10 Amp
Red
—
Ignition/Cigar
Lighter
Instrument Panel
19
Cartridge
Fuse
—
20
—
Radiator Fan Relay
21
—
Sunroof – If
Equipped
Wireless Control
Module (WCM)/
Clock/Steering
Control Module
(SCM)
Auto Shutdown
(ASD) Relay
22
—
23
—
24
—
Description
Cavity
Mini
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Audio Amplifier –
If Equipped
Radio
Siren – If Equipped
Ignition Run –
Climate Controls/
Hot Cupholder –
If Equipped
Auto Shutdown
(ASD) Relay 3
Sunroof – If
Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469
25
Cartridge
Fuse
—
Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
26
—
27
—
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
10 Amp
Red
Cavity
28
Cartridge
Fuse
—
Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
29
—
—
30
—
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Cavity
Ignition Run —
Heated Mirrors If Equipped
Auto Shutdown
(ASD) Relay 2
Ignition Run –
Occupant Classification Module
(OCM)/Occupant
Restraint Controller
(ORC)
31
32
—
30 Amp
Pink
—
—
Description
Ignition Run —
Occupant
Classification
Module (OCM)/
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)
Hot Car (No Fuse
Required)
Ignition Run –
Heated Seats –
If Equipped
Spare
Auto Shutdown
(ASD) Relay 1
7
470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
33
34
Cartridge
Fuse
—
Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Pink
—
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
Mini
Fuse
—
36
30 Amp
Pink
—
37
—
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Cavity
Switch Bank/
Diagnostic Link
Connector/
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
Anti-Lock Brakes
(ABS) Module –
If Equipped/
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)
Module – If
Equipped
35
Description
Anti-Lock Brakes
(ABS) Module –
If Equipped/
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)
Module – If
Equipped
Passenger Door
Module (PDM)/
Driver Door
Module (DDM)
Power Top Module
– If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471
CAUTION!
• When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than
21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your
battery.
• Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
• Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement.
7
472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Bulbs
Front Courtesy/Reading
Lamp
Center Courtesy/Reading
Lamp
Visor Vanity Lamp
Glove Box Lamp
Shift Indicator Lamp
Rear Compartment
(Trunk) Lamp
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
578/W5W
578/W5W
A6220
A6220
IKLE14140
579
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized
dealer for replacement.
Low Beam Headlamp
High Beam Headlamp
Front Park/Turn Signal
Lamp
Front Fog Lamp
Front Side Marker Lamp
Center High Mounted
Stop (CHMSL) Lamp
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn
Signal Lamp
Backup Lamp
License Lamp
Bulb Number
9006
9005
3457A
H11
WY5W
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
921
W5W
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
2. Reach into engine compartment and from behind the
lamp assembly and grasp the connector.
Headlamp
1. Raise the hood and locate the connector behind the
head lamp.
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner
filter housing and position the totally integrated power
module aside prior to replacing the low beam headlamp
on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
7
Bulb Access Points
474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Rotate bulb and connector ¼ turn and pull outward
from assembly.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace the bulb.
Bulb Rotation
Bulb Removal
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475
5. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
4. Pull the bulb off of connector and replace with a new
one.
6. Reinsert the bulb and socket assembly and rotate
clockwise ¼ turn to secure.
CAUTION!
Fog Lamps
1. Access to the lamps through the lower fascia cutout is
limited.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
2. Turn the steering wheel to allow access and remove
the inner fender shield.
3. Rotate the bulb and connector ¼ turn counterclockwise.
7
476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly outward pushing
gently on the studs from inside to disengage the lamp
1. Open the trunk and gently pull back the trunk liner
housing.
behind the tail lamp.
Backup Lamps
2. Remove the two plastic wing nuts from the tail lamp
housing.
Tail Lamp Housing
4. Twist and remove socket from lamp.
Tail Lamp Housing Wing Nut
5. Remove bulb from socket and replace.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477
License Plate Lamp
2. Gently pry the lamp assembly loose.
1. Remove two retaining screws holding the light lens in 3. Pull bulb from socket, replace and reattach the lamp
place.
assembly with the two retaining screws.
7
478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines — (Except 2.4L PZEV)
16.9 Gallons
2.4L PZEV (Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle)
18.5 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
4.5 Quarts
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
6 Quarts
Cooling System*
2.4L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
7.7 Quarts
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
3.6L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
11.6 Quarts
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
64 Liters
70 Liters
4.26 Liters
5.6 Liters
7.3 Liters
11 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine except
PZEV*
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®,
Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
SAE grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®,
Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
SAE grade.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
7
480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Spark Plugs – 2.4L with PZEV*
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.031 in [0.8 mm]).
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
Fuel Selection
87 Octane
* PZEV = Partial Zero Emission Vehicle
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4®
fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We
recommend MOPAR® ATF+4® fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 and SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR®
ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
482 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inremind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
formation.
scheduled maintenance.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interBased on engine operation conditions, the oil change
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
indicator message will illuminate. This means that serwhichever comes first.
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or Severe Duty All Models
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
• Check engine oil level
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a • Check windshield washer fluid level
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 483 M
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system
turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission
(four-speed only) and fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
8
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals
and replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary.
Adjust parking brake as necessary
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
32,000
20,000
M 484 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Maintenance Chart
N
T
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
E
N
A
N
Or Years: 2
C
E
Or Kilometers:
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Replace spark plugs (2.4L Engine). **
Replace spark plugs (2.4L PZEV Engine Only). **
Replace spark plugs (3.6L Engine). **
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if
using your vehicle for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 485 M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 486 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I ** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
N yearly intervals do not apply.
T
E
WARNING!
N
A
N • You can be badly injured working on or around a
C
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .490
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .490
▫ In Mexico Contact:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .494
9
488 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . .495
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 489
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
490 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 423–6343
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 491
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
9
492 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 493
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
operating at its best.
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could http://www.safercar.gov.
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
manufacturer.
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
MOPAR® PARTS
9
494 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 495
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
9
496 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
498 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .436
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antenna, Satellite Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .280
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
INDEX 499
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . .21
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .26 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
10
500 INDEX
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .430
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .265
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .449
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
INDEX 501
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .177
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Crankcase Ventilation Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
10
502 INDEX
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .227
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .430
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
INDEX 503
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Fabric Care. . . . . . . . .
Filler Location Fuel . . .
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . .
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . .
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . .
Fuel Requirements .
Maintenance . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.436
.288
.436
.436
.398
.398
.101
.168
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.377
.376
.374
.377
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.377
.377
.297
.478
.101
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.455
.452
.446
.433
.323
.479
.168
.161
.418
.369
.378
.372
.370
10
504 INDEX
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . .
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .
Filler Door (Gas Cap)
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . .
Light . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . . .
Requirements . . . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . . . .
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . .
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel System Caution . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.370
.211
.211
.369
.211
.212
.372
.370
.369
.369
.478
.374
.378
.379
.465
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
INDEX 505
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . .
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
. . . . . . . . .384 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
. . . . . . . . .180 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .173
. . . . . . . . .163 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.473
.473
.461
.168
.168
.166
.168
.165
.157
.112
.152
.275
.299
10
506 INDEX
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
iPod®/USB/MP3 Control
Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Keyless Entry System (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .334
Knee Bolster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
INDEX 507
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .222
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .211
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
10
508 INDEX
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .222
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
INDEX 509
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Phone (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .343
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .193
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
10
510 INDEX
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .449
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Remote Control
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .272
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
INDEX 511
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .51
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Seat Belts (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Setting the Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . . .288
10
512 INDEX
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls .
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.101
.359
.351
.353
.177
.211
.295
.295
.297
.297
.295
.295
.
.
.
.
.
.
.322
.176
.176
.272
.272
.471
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .60
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire and Loading Information Placard . .
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.215
.476
.176
.280
.211
.176
.167
.342
.336
.101
.356
.347
.359
INDEX 513
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . .
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.401
.353
.347
.350
.348
.401
.356
.342
.360
.221
.495
.350
.357
.359
.336
.338
.351
.402
.355
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-Hour Towing Assistance
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . .
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . .
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer and Tongue Weight .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.389
.356
.336
.386
.382
.127
.421
.385
.394
.385
.127
.319
.382
.393
.384
.387
.392
.386
.390
10
514 INDEX
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Transaxle
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .180
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Trip Odometer Reset Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Uconnect® (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Making A Phone Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Understanding Your Instrument Panel. . . . . . . . . . .208
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .265
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
INDEX 515
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .211 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Washer
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency
signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must
be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must
be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to the
battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal
adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection
should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or
the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting
antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy
or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed
away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully
shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a
low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal
may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference
between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
electronic systems.
2014 Avenger
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
14D41-126-AB
Second Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Avenger
Uconnect 730N
®
14UC730-526-AA
First Edition
Uconnect® 730N
Chrysler Group LLC
Printed in the USA
Owner’s Manual Supplement
NOTICE:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
NOTICE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules [and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada]. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: this device may not cause
harmful interference, and this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interferNOTICE:
ence in a residential installation. This equipment generChanges or modifications made to this equipment not ates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
expressly approved by the radio manufacturer may void not installed and used in accordance with the instructhe FCC authorization to operate this equipment.
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interferFCC Declaration
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
radio or television reception, which can be determined by
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
this device must accept any interference received, includto try to correct the interference by one or more of the
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
following measures: - Increase the separation between
Modifications not expressly approved by the radio the equipment and receiver. - Consult the dealer or an
manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate experienced radio technician for help.
the equipment.
Safety Information
End User License Agreement NAVTEQ
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated
output power of the this internal wireless radio is far
below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio shall be used in such a manner
that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific
community. The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of
energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
some situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the
wireless radio.
PLEASE READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE NAVTEQ
DATABASE NOTICE TO THE USER THIS IS A LICENSE
AGREEMENT - AND NOT AN AGREEMENT FOR
SALE – BETWEEN YOU AND NAVTEQ B.V. FOR YOUR
COPY OF THE NAVTEQ NAVIGABLE MAP DATABASE, INCLUDING ASSOCIATED COMPUTER SOFTWARE, MEDIA AND EXPLANATORY PRINTED
DOCUMENTATION
PUBLISHED
BY
NAVTEQ
(JOINTLY ”THE DATABASE”). BY USING THE DATABASE, YOU ACCEPT AND AGREE TO ALL TERMS
AND CONDITIONS OF THIS END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (”AGREEMENT”). IF YOU DO NOT
AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT,
PROMPTLY RETURN THE DATABASE, ALONG WITH
ALL OTHER ACCOMPANYING ITEMS, TO YOUR SUPPLIER FOR A REFUND.
OWNERSHIP
The Database and the copyrights and intellectual property or neighboring rights therein are owned by
NAVTEQ or its licensors. Ownership of the media on
which the Database is contained is retained by NAVTEQ
and/or your supplier until after you have paid in full any
amounts due to NAVTEQ and/or your supplier pursuant
to this Agreement or similar agreement(s) under which
goods are provided to you.
LIMITATIONS ON USE
The Database is restricted for use in the specific system
for which it was created. Except to the extent explicitly
permitted by mandatory laws (e.g. national laws based
on the European Software Directive (91/250) and the
Database Directive (96/9)), you may not extract or reutilize substantial parts of the contents of the Database nor
reproduce, copy, modify, adapt, translate, disassemble,
decompile, reverse engineer any portion of the Database.
If you wish to obtain interoperability information as
LICENSE GRANT
meant in (the national laws based on) the European
NAVTEQ grants you a non-exclusive license to use the Software Directive, you shall grant NAVTEQ reasonable
Database for your personal use or, if applicable, for use in opportunity to provide said information on reasonable
your business’ internal operations. This license does not terms, including costs, to be determined by NAVTEQ.
include the right to grant sublicenses.
TRANSFER OF LICENSE
You may not transfer the Database to third parties, except
when installed in the system for which it was created or
when you do not retain any copy of the Database, and
provided that the transferee agrees to all terms and
conditions of this Agreement and confirms this in writing
to NAVTEQ. Multi-disc sets may only be transferred or
sold as a complete set as provided by NAVTEQ and not
as subset thereof.
LIMITED WARRANTY
NAVTEQ warrants that, subject to the warnings set out
below, for a period of 12 months after acquisition of your
copy of the Database, it will perform substantially in
accordance with NAVTEQ’s Criteria for Accuracy and
Completeness existing on the date you acquired the Database; these criteria are available from NAVTEQ at your
request. If the Database does not perform in accordance
with this limited warranty, NAVTEQ will use reasonable
efforts to repair or replace your nonconforming copy of the
Database. If these efforts do not lead to performance of the
Database in accordance with the warranties set out herein,
you will have the option to either receive a reasonable
refund of the price you paid for the Database or to rescind
this Agreement. This shall be NAVTEQ’s entire liability
and your sole remedy against NAVTEQ. Except as expressly provided in this section, NAVTEQ does not warrant nor make any representations regarding the use of
results of the use of the Database in terms of its correctness,
accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. NAVTEQ does not warrant that the Database is or will be error free. No oral or
written information or advice provided by NAVTEQ, your
supplier or any other person shall create a warranty or in
any way increase the scope of the limited warranty described above. The limited warranty set forth in this
Agreement does not affect or prejudice any statutory legal
rights that you may have under the legal warranty against
hidden defects.
If you did not acquire the Database from NAVTEQ
directly, you may have statutory rights against the person
from whom you have acquired the Database in addition
to the rights granted by NAVTEQ hereunder according to
the law of your jurisdiction. The above warranty of
NAVTEQ shall not affect such statutory rights and you
may assert such rights in addition to the warranty rights
granted herein.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
The price of the Database does not include any consideration for assumption of risk of consequential, indirect
or unlimited direct damages which may arise in connection with your use of the Database. Accordingly, in no
event shall NAVTEQ be liable for any consequential or
indirect damages, including without limitation, loss of
revenue, data, or use, incurred by you or any third party
arising out of your use of the Database, whether in an
action in contract or tort or based on a warranty, even if
NAVTEQ has been advised of the possibility of such
damages. In any event NAVTEQ’s liability for direct
damages is limited to the price of your copy of the
Database.
THE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY, SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT
AFFECT OR PREJUDICE YOUR STATUTORY RIGHTS
WHERE YOU HAVE ACQUIRED THE DATABASE
OTHERWISE THAN IN THE COURSE OF A BUSINESS.
WARNINGS
The Database may contain inaccurate or incomplete
information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances, sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results. The Database does not include or reflect
information on - inter alia - neighborhood safety; law
enforcement; emergency assistance; construction work;
road or lane closures; vehicle or speed restrictions; road End-User License Agreement Gracenote
slope or grade; bridge height, weight or other limits; road
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF
or traffic conditions; special events; traffic congestion; or
THE TERMS BELOW.
travel time.
Gracenote® MusicID® Terms of Use
GOVERNING LAW
This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of
This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the
Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from
jurisdiction, in which you reside at the date of acquisition
Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this appliof the Database. Should you at that moment reside outside
cation to do online disc identification and obtain musicthe European Union or Switzerland, the law of the jurisrelated information, including name, artist, track, and
diction within the European Union or Switzerland where
title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers
you acquired the Database shall apply. In all other cases, or
(“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions.
if the jurisdiction where you acquired the Database cannot
You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the
be defined, the laws of the Netherlands shall apply. The
intended End-User functions of this device.
courts competent at your place of residence at the time you
acquired the Database shall have jurisdiction over any You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the
dispute arising out of, or relating to this Agreement, Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own
without prejudice to NAVTEQ’s right to bring claims at personal noncommercial use only. You agree not to
your then current place of residence.
assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software
The Gracenote MusicID Service uses a unique identifier
to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a
randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the
Gracenote MusicID service to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For more inforYou agree that your non-exclusive license to use the
mation, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Policy for the Gracenote MusicID Service.
Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If
your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data
use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and are licensed to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes no repreGracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in sentations or warranties, express or implied, regarding
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the
Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete
no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data
payment to you for any information that you provide. categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient.
You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or
under this Agreement against you directly in its own Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of
name.
or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE
NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with
new enhanced or additional data types or categories that
Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to
discontinue its online services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT
WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED
BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACE-NOTE SOFTWARE OR
ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST
PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
© Gracenote 2007 Version 2.2
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and service
may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents:
#5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192,
#6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license
from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of
Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the
⬙Powered by Gracenote⬙ logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
UCONNECT® MULTIMEDIA (RADIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2
3
UCONNECT® MULTIMEDIA (MEDIA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3
4
UCONNECT® MULTIMEDIA (REMOTE DEVICES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
4
5
VOICE COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
5
6
UCONNECT® PHONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
6
7
UCONNECT® GPS NAVIGATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
7
8
SYSTEM INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
8
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
䡵 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
䡵 Safety References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
䡵 Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
䡵 System Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
▫ Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
▫ Safe Usage of the Radio Navigation System . . . .7
▫ GPS Navigation Antenna
(Export Vehicles Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
▫ GPS Navigation/Satellite Radio Antenna
(Combo Antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
▫ Other Electronic Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
䡵 General Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
▫ User Interface Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
▫ Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
▫ Steering Wheel Mounted Controls
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
▫ Audio Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Disc Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
1
4 INTRODUCTION
䡵 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Connect Bluetooth® Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Soft-keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Set Default Country and/or State . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Disclaimer for Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Enter Home Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Change the Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Change Home Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Set the Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Voice Command Tutorial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Store Radio Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Uconnect® Phone Tutorial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
INTRODUCTION 5
• Road conditions and regulations take precedence over
information contained on the map display. Observe
Ensure that all persons read this manual carefully before
actual traffic restrictions and circumstances when
using the navigation system. It contains instructions on
driving.
how to use the system in a safe and effective manner.
• Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. Failure to
WARNING!
do so may cause injury or damage to the product.
Return it to your authorized dealer to repair.
Please read and follow these precautions. Failure to
• There may be situations where the navigation system
do so may result in injury or property damage.
erroneously displays the vehicle’s location. Use your
• When using the navigation system to route you to an
own driving judgement in this situation, taking into
emergency facility, contact the facility to verify its
account current driving conditions. Please be aware
location.
that in this situation the navigation system should
automatically correct the vehicle position within a few
• Not all emergency service locations are contained in
minutes.
the database. Please use your own judgement and ask
Safety Guidelines
• Make certain that the volume level of the system is set
to a level that still allows you to hear outside traffic
• Glance at the screen only when necessary and safe to
and emergency vehicles.
do so. If prolonged viewing of the screen is necessary,
pull over at a safe location.
for directions in such situations.
1
6 INTRODUCTION
• The map database is designed to provide you with
route suggestions and does not take into account the
relative safety of suggested route or factors that may
affect the time required to reach your destination. Use
your own personal judgement if the navigation system
is unable to provide you with an alternative route.
Warnings
• The law in some states prohibits the Front Seat DVD
Viewer even while in park. As a result, it may be
disabled prior to delivery to you. If you move to
another state, you should consult your dealer for the
proper enable/disable setting for your new state.
Currently all states prohibit front seat video viewers
except for: Arkansas, Delaware, Georgia, Hawaii,
Idaho, Iowa, Kentucky, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, North Dakota and Ohio.
The information given in this manual is subject to
change.
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures that could result in an accident or bodily
injury. If you do not read the entire manual you may miss
important information. Observe all WARNINGS!
Safety References
Before operating this navigation system, review the
safety precautions described in this manual. If you have
any questions, please contact the vehicle manufacturer.
INTRODUCTION 7
Intended Use
Safe Usage of the Radio Navigation System
Generally recognized rules of navigation technology
were maintained during the development and manufacture of the RHR navigation system (NTG4 Refresh).
When using this product, be aware of state-specific
norms and guidelines.
Read all instructions in this manual carefully before
using your radio system to ensure proper usage.
Your radio is a sophisticated electronic device. Do not let
young children use your radio unsupervised.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play your music
Visit www.DriveUconnect.com for updates, additional at the highest volume. Exercise caution when setting the
information, compatible phones, etc.
volume on your radio.
Driving is a complex activity that requires your full
attention. If you’re engaged in driving or any activity that
Software Update
requires your full attention, we recommend that you not
Both navigation data and Gracenote® data are software use your radio navigation system.
updatable. Visit www.DriveUconnect.com or contact
your authorized dealer for the latest available software.
System Care
1
8 INTRODUCTION
NOTE:
Many features of this radio are speed dependent. For
your own safety it is not possible to use the touch screen
keyboard to enter a name (e.g., street name), while the
vehicle is in motion. Pull over at a safe location to
complete your task.
Any attached cable should be routed so that it will not
apply any pressure to the connection.
Do not use a USB device which will interfere with the
operation of opening the display.
Touch Screen
Keep drinks, rain, and other sources of moisture away Do not touch the screen with any hard or sharp objects
from your radio. Besides damage to your radio, moisture which could scratch the touch screen surface (pen, USB
stick, jewelry, etc.)!
can cause electric shocks with any electronic device.
NOTE:
NOTE:
In a convertible vehicle, the system performance may be It is possible to use a plastic stylus for press screen
enabled devices such as PDA and Pocket PCs.
compromised with roof top down.
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on
the screen. Use a clean and dry microfiber lens cleaning
Never force any connector into the ports of your radio.
cloth in order to clean the touch screen.
Make sure your connectors are the correct shape and size
before you connect.
Connections
INTRODUCTION 9
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a
cleaning solution such as isopropyl alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to
follow solvent manufacturer’s precautions and directions.
GPS Navigation Antenna (Export Vehicles Only)
The antenna for the navigation GPS system is mounted in
various locations (depending on the vehicle model)
within the dashboard. Do not place items on the dashboard around the GPS antenna location. Objects placed
within the line of sight of the antenna will decrease
Disc Drive
performance. Do not place items directly on or above the
Do not insert any damaged, warped, scratched or dirty
antenna.
CDs or DVDs into the Disc player.
GPS Navigation/Satellite Radio Antenna
Discs that have been modified with an adhesive label
(Combo Antenna)
should not be used in the Disc player.
The antenna for the GPS navigation and the satellite
Do not insert more than one Disc at a time into the drive
radio is mounted on the roof of most vehicles. Do not
slot.
place items on the roof around the roof top antenna
Do not insert anything other than the supported Disc location. Objects placed within the line of sight of the
formats. See Disc Mode section for information on antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lugsupported Disc formats.
gage items should be placed as far from the antenna as
possible. Do not place items directly on or above the
antenna.
1
10 INTRODUCTION
Other Electronic Devices
General Handling
If you bring other electronic devices into your vehicle User Interface Elements
(e.g., PDA, iPod, laptop computer, CB Radios, etc.), some
may cause electromagnetic interference with the GPS. If a
degradation in the navigation system is observed, turn
the devices off, or keep them as far away from the GPS
antenna as possible.
Power to operate the navigation radio is supplied
through the ignition switch, which must be in the ON,
ACC or in ACC Delay mode in order to operate the
navigation radio.
INTRODUCTION 11
Soft-Keys
NOTE:
Soft-keys are accessible on the touch screen.
• It may take several seconds to recognize the type of
inserted disc (CD, DVD, MP3, etc.).
Hard-Keys
Hard-keys are on the left and right side of the radio • If a CD or DVD will not eject from the player when the
OPEN/CLOSE hard-key is pressed, the user can perfaceplate.
form the following eject override procedure:
(1) OPEN/CLOSE
1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE hard-key to open the display
To open or close the display, press the OPEN CLOSE
door.
hard-key (1).
2. If the display door will not open when the hard-key is
After opening the display, it takes a few seconds to eject
pressed, manually open the display door by gently
a CD/DVD, if one was in the slot.
pulling out on the bottom of the display door.
When inserting a disc, make sure the label is facing up.
The display will close automatically after inserting the
disc.
3. While the display door is open, simultaneously press
and hold the SEEK UP, SEEK DOWN and NAV
hard-keys.
4. The CD or DVD will eject from the player.
1
12 INTRODUCTION
navigation software is always working when the ignition
is switched ON, even if the radio is in standby mode. It is
Press the SEEK up and the SEEK down hard-key (2) to
possible to eject the CD and to display the time if the unit
seek through radio stations in AM, FM, or SAT bands.
is switched off.
Seek through tracks in CD or iPod® modes or through
songs in the HDD playlist.
(5) Voice Command
(2) SEEK UP/SEEK DOWN
(3) RADIO/MEDIA
Press the RADIO/MEDIA hard-key (3) to toggle between
RADIO and MEDIA mode.
Press the Voice Command
hard-key (5) and
wait for the confirmation beep before you say a
voice command.
(4) ON/OFF VOLUME
NOTE:
It is possible to set the unit in standby mode during driving Some vehicles may be equipped with a Voice Command
button on the steering wheel.
by pressing the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob (4).
(6) Uconnect® Phone
NOTE:
If the ignition is switched OFF with the radio in standby
hard-key (6) to
Press the Uconnect® Phone
mode, the radio memorizes the standby state when the
either activate the Uconnect® Phone system or
ignition is switched ON again. Press the (4) ON/OFF
to cancel an active phone call.
VOLUME rotary knob to switch the radio ON. The
INTRODUCTION 13
NOTE:
(9) USB Connector
• If you are in one of the navigation menus (NAV Menu, Connect a supported device into the USB connector (9) in
MAP display, etc.), you need to press the Uconnect® order to copy files to the internal hard disk drive.
Phone hard-key twice to end an active call.
NOTE:
• Some vehicles may be equipped with a Uconnect® See USB connector section for information on supported
devices.
Phone button on the steering wheel.
(7) MENU
(10) Auxiliary Jack
Press the MENU hard-key (7) to access the system Connect an external audio device into the AUX Input (10)
(e.g., MP3 player, video-game), to play the device audio
settings menu.
through the car audio system.
NOTE:
Press the MENU hard-key in an active mode in order to Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
change mode specific settings.
Some vehicles feature an Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) with driver-interactive display. The EVIC is
normally located in the instrument cluster or overhead. It
Press the NAV hard-key (8) either to switch to the can display radio station frequencies, CD disc number,
navigation mode or to toggle between the navigation satellite radio channel, and navigation system information.
menu and the map viewer menu.
(8) NAV
1
14 INTRODUCTION
3. The FUNCTION SELECT button, located in the center
of the left rocker switch, advances the navigation radio
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
to the next preset, changes the current disc when in
surface of the steering wheel. Please refer to the vehicle
disc mode, etc. The function is different depending
specific Owner’s Manual on the DVD for detailed inforupon which mode is in use.
mation.
The following describes general steering wheel function- 4. The SCROLL rocker switch, located on the left,
changes selections such as radio station, CD track, and
ality:
satellite radio channel, depending upon the current
1. The VOLUME rocker switch, located on the right,
mode.
controls the volume of the sound system. Pressing the
The following describes the operation of the SCROLL
top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and
switch in each mode:
pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease
the volume.
AM/FM/SAT Operation
Steering Wheel Mounted Controls (If Equipped)
2. The MODE ADVANCED button, located in the center
of the right rocker switch, changes the mode of the
navigation radio between the various modes available
(FM, AM, CD, DVD, SAT, NAV etc.).
Pressing the top of the rocker switch will seek up for the
next available station and pressing the bottom of the
rocker switch will seek down for the next available
station.
INTRODUCTION 15
HDD/Disc/iPod® Operation
Audio Control Menu
Pressing the top of the rocker switch will go to the next Press the MENU hard-key (7) on the right side of the
track on the disc, and pressing the bottom of the rocker radio. Then press the Audio Control soft-key to get to the
switch will go to the beginning of the current track, or to audio control menu.
the beginning of the previous track, if it is within one
second of the start of the current track.
Video Entertainment System (VES)™ Operation
If equipped with a remote video player, this control will
function the same way as in disc mode.
Audio Settings
Volume
Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob (4) to adjust the
volume of the currently playing audio source. While you
adjust the volume, the name of the audio source and a
volume indicator are displayed in the lower left corner of
the display.
1
16 INTRODUCTION
Use either the arrow soft-keys or the cross-hair on the Getting Started
screen to change Balance and Fade. The CENTER softNOTE:
key resets the settings.
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to
operate the navigation radio.
If the unit is off, switch it on using the ON/OFF Volume
rotary knob.
Soft-keys
The BACK soft-key takes you to the previous
screen.
The EXIT soft-key always takes you to
the main menu.
Press the Equalizer soft-key and use either the arrow
soft-keys or the sliders on the screen to adjust BASS,
MID, and/or TREBLE.
INTRODUCTION 17
Disclaimer for Navigation Radio
Change the Language
The navigation radio will conform to the vehicle language set in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC), if equipped.
If you change the language in the navigation radio, the
system will change the language for all display information.
To change the language with the navigation radio:
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the right side of the
radio.
Before using the navigation radio read and accept the
disclaimer. The disclaimer will be activated after the
ignition is turned on.
2. Press the System Setup soft-key to get to the System
Setup menu.
1
18 INTRODUCTION
3. Press the Language soft-key and select a language.
Set the Time
1. Press the Time Display soft-key in the lower left corner
of the screen.
The time is automatically set by the GPS system for the
time zone selected.
2. Press the Set Time Zone soft-key to change to the
desired time zone.
3. Press the Daylight Savings soft-key to switch Daylight
Savings on or off.
INTRODUCTION 19
It is possible to set the time manually (ahead or behind 2. Select the radio band by touching either the AM, FM
or SAT soft-key.
actual GPS time), by pressing the USER CLOCK soft-key.
3. Either press the SEEK up/down hard-keys, or touch
the SCAN soft-key, DIRECT TUNE soft-key, or the left
1. Press the Radio Media hard-key until AM FM SAT is
and right arrows to change the currently playing
displayed in the upper left corner of the screen.
station.
Store Radio Presets
4. Touch and hold one of the station preset soft-keys for
two seconds and you will see the highlighted soft-key
change from green to beige. You will also see the radio
station stored in the highlighted soft-key, and you will
hear a confirmation beep when the station is saved.
NOTE:
If the preset list is not displayed press the PRESETS
soft-key, located in the bottom line of the screen, repeatedly until the preset list is displayed.
1
20 INTRODUCTION
You can use the PRESETS soft-key to toggle between:
To turn the preset list off.
To turn the preset artist list on.
To turn the preset song title list on.
To turn the preset station list on.
Connect Bluetooth® Devices
NOTE:
Visit www.DriveUconnect.com for a list of compatible
phones/devices.
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the right side of the
radio.
2. Then touch the System Setup soft-key to get to the
System Setup menu.
You can use the PAGE Up and Down soft-keys to scroll
through the list of presets.
3. Touch the Device Pairing soft-key to access the
Bluetooth® Devices menu.
You can use the FULLSCREEN soft-key to
toggle between fullscreen and splitscreen
mode. Long preset names are displayed in
fullscreen mode.
INTRODUCTION 21
1
This menu lists all paired Bluetooth® devices.
4. Press the PAIR soft-key to start a new pairing.
5. Enter any 4 Digit Security PIN and touch the PAIR
soft-key again.
6. The pairing procedure starts. Refer to the user’s manual
of your Bluetooth® phone to complete the procedure.
22 INTRODUCTION
NOTE:
If the phone book download feature is supported by your
cell phone, only the first 1000 contacts will be automatically copied to the radio. Contacts will be downloaded
from your SIM card first and then copied from your
phones default phone book.
Set Default Country and/or State
1. Press the NAV hard-key on the right side of the radio.
2. Press the MENU hard-key.
7. You will then be asked to set a priority for the paired
phone. If there is more than one paired phone available, the navigation radio will try to connect to the
phone with the highest priority setting.
INTRODUCTION 23
1
3. Touch the NAV Settings soft-key.
4. Touch either the Set Default Country to select your
default country or touch the Set Default State soft-key
to select your default state.
24 INTRODUCTION
Enter Home Address
1. Press the NAV hard-key on the right side of the radio.
If the radio does not display the NAV - Main Menu,
press the NAV hard-key again, or touch the MAIN
MENU soft-key on the display.
If no home address has been set, touch YES to access the
Enter Home Address menu.
3. Touch Street Address to enter your address.
2. Touch the Guide Me Home soft-key to enter your
home address.
INTRODUCTION 25
1
4. Touch the soft-key with your state’s name and enter NOTE:
your street name into the speller.
Read more about destination input and the predictive
speller in the Navigation section of this manual.
5. Once the street name has been input, touch continue to
confirm.
26 INTRODUCTION
6. Enter the house number into the next screen. If more After you have entered your home address, the system
than one city has this address, you will then need to will start a route guidance to your home every time you
press the Guide Me Home soft-key.
select your city from a list.
Once the address is entered completely, the system shows Change Home Address
a map of your home address area.
This procedure will allow you to change your Home
Address if one has already been entered.
1. Press the MENU hard-key.
7. Touch the SAVE soft-key to confirm the address.
INTRODUCTION 27
2. Touch the My Files soft-key.
1
4. Touch the Home soft-key.
3. Touch the My Address Book soft-key.
5. Touch the Edit Contact soft-key.
6. Touch the Change Address soft-key.
28 INTRODUCTION
• There may be instances when entering a city first prior
to the address will locate the correct address more
accurately.
7. Touch the soft-key with your state’s name and enter
your street name into the speller.
NOTE:
• If the State or Country needs to be changed, touch the
appropriate soft-key to edit the setting.
8. Once the street name has been input, touch continue to
confirm.
INTRODUCTION 29
9. Enter the house number into the next screen. If more After you have changed your home address, the system
than one city has this address, you will then need to will start a route guidance to your home every time you
select your city from a list.
press the Guide Me Home soft-key.
Once the address is entered completely, the system shows Voice Command Tutorial
a map of your home address area.
When you press the Voice Command hard-key, you will
hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a command.
Say TUTORIAL to listen to a Voice Command tutorial.
Press any hard-key or touch the display to cancel the
tutorial.
Uconnect® Phone Tutorial
When you press the Uconnect® Phone hard-key, you will
hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a command.
Say TUTORIAL to listen to a Uconnect® Phone system
tutorial.
10. Touch the SAVE soft-key to confirm the address.
Press any hard-key or touch the display to cancel the
tutorial.
1
Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO)
2
CONTENTS
䡵 Radio Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Manage SAT Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System) . . . . . . . .39
▫ SiriusXM Satellite Radio Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Radio Text Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ Change a Channel or Frequency . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ MUSIC TYPE (Program Type Filter) . . . . . . . . .39
▫ Replay Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ RBDS (FM) Program Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ SiriusXM Satellite Radio Channel List . . . . . . .35
▫ SiriusXM Satellite Radio Program Type
(SAT Music Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Station Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ SiriusXM Satellite Radio Favorites
(SAT Favorites) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Display SAT Favorites List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ Scan by Genre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Scan by Music Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Game Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
32 Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO)
䡵 SiriusXM Satellite Travel Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Save a Favorite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Changing a SiriusXM Travel Link Favorite . . . .46
▫ Parental Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Deleting a SiriusXM Travel Link Favorite
Sports Team . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ Re-Subscribe to SiriusXM Satellite Radio . . . . .53
▫ Weather Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
䡵 Radio Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ AM / FM MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ SAT MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
▫ Screen-saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ View Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ ParkView® Rear Backup Camera
(if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO) 33
Radio Mode
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Mode
SiriusXM Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver
broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound,
The RHR navigation radio (NTG4 Refresh) is equipped
coast to coast. The subscription service provider is SiriusXM
with three different tuners:
Satellite Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of
music, sports, news, entertainment, and programming for
• FM 87.7 MHz - 107.9 MHz (RBDS capable)
children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting stu• AM 530 kHz - 1710 kHz
dios. A one-year SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription is
included.
• SAT SiriusXM Satellite Radio (over 130 channels)
Toggle between the radio and the media menus by pressing SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks
the RADIO/MEDIA hard-key. The different tuner modes of SiriusXM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. SiriusXM
Radio requires a subscription, sold separately after trial
can be selected via the tabs in the radio screen.
subscription included with vehicle purchase. Prices and
programming are provided by SiriusXM and are subject
to change. Subscriptions governed by Terms & Conditions available at sirius.com/ serviceterms. SiriusXM
Radio U.S. service only available to those at least 18 years
of age in the 48 contiguous United States, D.C., and PR.
Service available in Canada; see www.siriuscanada.ca.
Overview
2
34 Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO)
Touch the right arrow soft-key to step up
This functionality is only available for radios equipped with
a Satellite receiver. In order to receive satellite radio, the
manually through the frequency or channel
vehicle needs to be outside with a clear view to the sky. If the
roster.
screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might have to change
the vehicle’s position in order to receive a signal. In most Select the SCAN soft-key for a five second preview of
cases, the satellite radio does not receive a signal in under- each listenable station in the frequency band. Touch the
ground parking garages or tunnels.
SCAN soft-key again to stop the scan function and to
select a radio station.
Change a Channel or Frequency
Press the SEEK up or the SEEK down hard-key to play Replay Mode
the next available station or channel.
Select the REPLAY soft-key for a replay of the currently
Select DIRECT TUNE to enter a frequency or a channel playing satellite radio station.
number, and confirm your selection by pressing the GO Use the left and right arrow soft-keys to move the red
soft-key.
replay slider. Depending on broadcast format, it is posTouch the left arrow soft-key to step down sible to replay up to one hour.
manually through the frequency or channel It is also possible to use the PAUSE/PLAY soft-key to
roster.
pause the playback for up to an hour.
Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO) 35
Select the LIVE soft-key to receive the currently playing Select the View All Channels soft-key in the SAT Browse
screen.
satellite radio station.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Channel List
Touch the SEARCH/BROWSE soft-key.
Touch the soft-key with the desired channel name to
select the channel.
You may use the LIST soft-key to toggle between:
To sort the list by artist.
To sort the list by song.
To sort the list by SiriusXM channel
name.
2
36 Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO)
Station Presets
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Favorites
There are 12 station presets available for storing the radio (SAT Favorites)
You can save 50 favorite songs and 50 favorite artists.
stations in each tuner range.
Touch the add favorite soft-key to add either
In order to store the desired station, touch and hold one
the song or the artist of the currently playing
of the station preset soft-keys for two seconds and you
program to the SAT Favorites list.
will see the highlighted soft-key change from green to
beige. You will also see the radio station stored in the
highlighted soft-key, and you will hear a confirmation NOTE:
Not all songs broadcasted will allow you to save it as a
beep when the station is saved.
favorite. The favorite soft-key will not be displayed
NOTE:
during those conditions.
If the vehicle is equipped with memory seats, when
The favorite star indicates that a favorite song
programming a profile and storing the radio presets, do
or artist is currently playing on one of the
not select another memory seat profile prior to switching
SiriusXM satellite radio channels.
OFF the ignition. To ensure the presets are saved, switch
OFF the ignition and wait until the USB Port light
(located in the center console or glove box, depending on
the vehicle) turns OFF before switching the ignition back
into the ON position.
Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO) 37
Display SAT Favorites List
Touch the SEARCH/BROWSE soft-key and
select Favorites from the SAT Browse screen.
Touch the desired favorites soft-key to switch the SAT
tuner to the corresponding channel.
You may use the LIST soft-key to toggle between:
To show a list of currently playing
favorite artists.
Example: If an Artist Alert is active, the radio displays a
popup message, to inform you that your favorite artist is
playing on one of the channels.
To show a list of currently playing
favorite songs.
To show a list of currently playing
favorites as they were initially saved.
2
38 Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO)
Touch the SETUP soft-key to manage the SAT Favorites The checkmarks in the Song Alerts and Game Alerts
soft-key indicate active alerts. Touch the corresponding
settings.
Alert soft-key to disable either all Song Alerts or all Game
Manage SAT Favorites
Alerts.
Touch the SEARCH/BROWSE soft-key, select
Touch the Favorite Songs & Artists soft-key to manage
Favorites from the SAT Browse screen.
individual songs and artists.
Select the SONGS soft-key to display the favorite songs,
and select the ARTISTS soft-key to show the favorite
artists.
The checkmark in the soft-key marks enabled favorites.
Touch the desired soft-key to de-activate the favorite, or
touch a corresponding DELETE soft-key to delete the
favorite from the list.
Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO) 39
RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System)
This radio navigation system is capable of receiving
RBDS signals in the FM band. RBDS is a technology used
for transmitting textual information about the music
type, song and artist for FM band music. This information is shown on the display.
NOTE:
Not all radio stations support RBDS.
Radio Text Information
Select the INFO soft-key to display additional
radio text information in the right half of the
screen.
Select the CLOSE INFO soft-key to hide additional radio text information.
The RBDS information is displayed below the frequency
MUSIC TYPE (Program Type Filter)
reading of the currently playing radio station.
Program Type (PTY) is only available in FM and SAT
mode. Radio stations are grouped according to their
program (e.g., Soft Rock, Rhythm & Blues, etc.).
Select MUSIC TYPE to enable and/or disable desired
program types. The SEEK and SCAN function will then
only display stations with matching program types.
2
40 Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO)
RBDS (FM) Program Types
Adult Hits, Classic Rock, Classical, College, Country,
Information, Jazz, Language, News, Nostalgia, Oldies,
Personality, Public, Religious Music, Religious Talk,
Rhythm and Blues, Rock, Soft, Soft Rhythm and Blues,
Soft Rock, Sports, Talk, Top 40, Weather.
Scan by Genre
Touch the SEARCH/BROWSE soft-key, select
View Genres from the SAT Browse screen.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Program Type
(SAT Music Type)
Pop, Rock, Electronic/Dance, Hip-Hop, Rhythm and Blues,
Country, Christian, Jazz and Blues, Standards, Classical,
Latin, International, Talk, Political Talk, Comedy, Entertainment, Howard Stern, Martha Stewart, Family & Kids,
Sports Talk & News, College, NFL, NBA, NHL, More
Sports, Soccer, NASCAR, Financial News, US News, International News, Public Radio, Weather, Religion.
You can find the latest SiriusXM channel line up at Example: Select the Rock category by touching the Rock
http://www.siriusxm.com.
soft-key.
Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO) 41
The radio displays all available station in this category.
Touch a soft-key with the corresponding artist, or song to
switch to play the desired channel.
Scan by Music Type
Touch the SEARCH/BROWSE soft-key, select
Type Scan from the SAT Browse screen.
2
42 Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO)
Game Zone
SiriusXM Satellite Travel Link
Touch the SEARCH/BROWSE soft-key, select Press the MENU hard-key and then the Travel Link
Game Zone from the SAT Browse screen.
soft-key.
NOTE:
Travel Link not available for Canadian market.
Select Forecast to display current and forecasted weather.
Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO) 43
Select Fuel Prices to check local gas and diesel prices.
Select Movie Listings to check local movie theaters and
listings.
2
Select Sports to check in-game and final scores as well as
upcoming schedules.
Select Favorites to display your favorite selections.
Select Ski Info to view ski and snowboarding conditions
at local ski resorts.
Select Weather Map to view a detailed weather map.
Save a Favorite
You may save 1 weather station, 1 ski resort, 1 gas station,
1 movie theater, and 8 sport teams.
On the Travel Link screen select Favorites to display the
list of your SiriusXM Favorites.
For example: Touch the No Favorite Gas Station Location
soft-key to display a list of gas stations.
44 Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO)
You may use the LIST soft-key to toggle between:
To sort the list by price.
To sort the list by distance to the
current vehicle location.
To sort the list by alphabet.
Touch the FUEL soft-key to select the desired fuel grade
used in the list view.
Touch the soft-key with the desired gas station to display
details for the selected gas station.
Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO) 45
You may now touch the ROUTE soft-key to enter the
address as a destination.
2
Touch the favorite gas station soft-key to save
this gas station as favorite.
Once a gas station is selected as favorite, the
soft-key changes.
Once a favorite was selected, the name and the selected
fuel price is displayed in the SiriusXM Favorites screen.
46 Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO)
Changing a SiriusXM Travel Link Favorite
Touch the favorite weather station soft-key to make the
For example: Touch the Forecast soft-key in the Travel current weather station a favorite. The new favorite
weather station replaced the old favorite weather station.
Link screen.
Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO) 47
Deleting a SiriusXM Travel Link Favorite Sports
Team
2
Touch the FAV soft-key to remove the
team from the Favorites list.
For example: Touch the Charlotte Bobcats soft-key in the
Favorites screen.
48 Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO)
Weather Map
Touch the Weather Map soft-key in the SiriusXM Travel
Link screen.
Touch the color legend soft-key to toggle the
color transparency.
Touch the U.S. soft-key to zoom into the entire
U.S.
Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO) 49
Touch the 150 mi, 50 mi, or 15 mi soft-key to
zoom into the desired area of the map. A lighter
soft-key color indicates a selected zoom level.
2
The initial map is centered at the vehicle location.
Touch the center soft-key to re-center the map
at the vehicle location.
Touch the weather info soft-key to display
issued weather warnings and details.
Touch the soft-key with the storm name to access more
detailed information.
50 Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO)
Touch the MAP soft-key to see a graphical depiction of Touch the DETAILS soft-key to receive detailed text
the warning area.
message for the selected weather warning.
Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO) 51
Touch the weather updates button to check for
the time of the last weather data update.
Touch the dim soft-key to dim or highlight the
radar map color chart.
Select the storm soft-key to display
rotating storm systems, such as hurricanes, tornados, etc.
Touch the NEXT and PREV soft-key to page through the
entire message.
2
52 Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO)
Select the radar map to depict the NOTE:
rain/snow accumulation map.
Soft-keys may be disabled upon availability of weather
data.
Select the isobar map to depict areas of
Touch the map buttons soft-key to toggle the
high and low pressure.
map buttons on or off.
Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO) 53
Radio Settings
Parental Lockout
AM / FM MENU
Select Parental Lockout to enable and/or disable desired
channels. The SEEK and SCAN function will then only
display channels without parental lockout.
There are no specific settings for this mode.
SAT MENU
Re-Subscribe to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
While in SAT mode press the MENU hard-key to display
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a one year
the SAT Menu.
subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio and SiriusXM
Favorites
Traffic on properly equipped vehicles. Following the
Select Favorites to manage the SAT Favorites. (see Satel- expiration of the one year service, it will be necessary to
access the information on the Subscription Information
lite Radio Mode for more information).
Screen in order to re-subscribe.
SiriusXM Travel Link
Select Travel Link to access SiriusXM Travel Link services. (see SiriusXM Travel Link for more information).
2
54 Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO)
Touch the Subscription soft-key to access the Subscrip- Display Settings
tion Information screen.
Press the MENU hard-key and touch the Display Settings
soft-key to access the Display Settings menu.
Write down the SiriusXM ID numbers for your receiver.
To reactivate your service either call the number listed on Select the Daytime Colors soft-key to switch to manual
the screen or visit the provider online.
daytime mode and to adjust the brightness of the display
using daytime colors.
Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO) 55
Select the Nighttime Colors soft-key to switch to manual View Settings
nighttime mode and to adjust the brightness of the Press the MENU hard-key to display a radio menu.
display using nighttime colors.
Select the Auto Color Mode soft-key to switch to automatic daytime/nighttime mode and to control the brightness of the display using the dimmer switch of the
vehicle.
Touch the EXIT soft-key to save your settings and to
return to the AM/FM/SAT Menu.
Screen-saver
To activate the screen-saver press the MENU hard-key
and touch the Screen Saver soft-key.
Once the screen saver is active, press any hard-key or Touch the Default View soft-key to enable the default
touch the display to deactivate it.
view mode, where the vehicle brand logo is displayed in
the right half of the screen.
2
56 Uconnect® Multimedia (RADIO)
Touch the Picture View soft-key to enable the picture ParkView® Rear Backup Camera (if equipped)
view mode, where a picture can be displayed on the right
half of the radio screen. Refer to the Hard Disk Drive
section of this manual for a detailed example.
Touch the Map View soft-key to enable the map view
mode.
In Map View mode the navigation map or turn-by-turn
navigation can be displayed on the right half of the radio
screen (see Navigation View Settings for more information).
When equipped with ParkView®, the radio display
shows the rear view camera picture as soon as the shifter
is in the REVERSE position for vehicles with automatic
transmission. In vehicles with manual transmission the
REVERSE gear must be engaged.
Touch the Camera Setup button in the System Setup
menu to disable or enable ParkView®.
Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA)
CONTENTS
䡵 Disc Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Rewind Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Displaying the Elapsed Title Time . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ Disc Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Select Title from List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ Inserting a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Disc Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ Removing a Disc From the Radio. . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Gracenote® Music Recognition Technology. . . .63
▫ Selecting Disc Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Copying Complete Disc to Hard-Drive . . . . . . .64
▫ Scan Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Disc Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Next Track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Playing a MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Previous Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ Playing a Video DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Fast Forward Track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ DVD Menu Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
3
58 Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA)
▫ DVD Playback Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
▫ Previous Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ DVD Video Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Fast Forward Track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Disc Skipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Rewind Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Temperature Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Displaying the Elapsed Title Time . . . . . . . . . .81
䡵 Hard Disk Drive Mode (HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
▫ HDD Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Copy Audio Disc to Hard-Drive . . . . . . . . . . .71
▫ Shuffle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Copy WMA/MP3 Files to Hard-Drive . . . . . . .73
▫ Repeat Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Selective Song Copying from Disc . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Favorite Playlists on the Hard Disk Drive. . . . .82
▫ Copying from USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ Editing Track Info on the Hard Disk Drive . . . .86
▫ Playing Audio Files from an external USB
device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
▫ Managing Playlists on the Hard Disk Drive
(Folders). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Playing Audio Files from the Hard
Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
▫ Deleting All Playlists from the Hard Disk
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Next Track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Importing Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA) 59
Disc Mode
Overview
The navigation radio is equipped with a CD/DVD player.
Disc Requirements
CAUTION!
This disc player will accept a 4 3/4 in (12 cm) disc
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
disc player mechanism.
The radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD+R and CD-R), rewritable
compact discs (CD+RW and CD-RW), recordable DVD-R,
DVD+R, DVD-RW, and DVD+RW compact discs.
Your radio will play the following formats:
MP3, WMA, CD Audio, DVD Audio, and DVD Video,
DVD-ROM, DVD Plus, DualDisc, SA-CD (CD Layer).
Toggle between the media and the radio menus by Do not insert anything other than the supported CD/
pressing the RADIO/MEDIA hard-key. The different DVD formats.
media modes can be selected via the tabs in the radio
screen.
3
60 Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA)
SACD (SACD layer) VCD, SVCD, VCD format on DVD NOTE:
A faulty CD is NOT automatically ejected. Use only stanand MPEG-4 are not supported.
dard size discs. Discs that have been modified with an
A complete list of supported CD/DVD formats is availadhesive label should not be used in the CD/DVD player.
able at www.DriveUconnect.com.
High definition content and media (e.g., HD-DVD, BluNOTE:
Ray) is not supported.
Blu-ray discs can only be played in the Blu-ray player
If the user does not remove an ejected CD within
and not the radio.
approximately 10 seconds, the CD will reload.
Inserting a Disc
NOTE:
1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE hard-key once.
• On MP3 and WMA CDs with a large number of songs,
2. With the printed side upwards, insert the disc into the
it may take several seconds to read, play, and display
disc slot of the radio. The radio pulls the disc in
information for all songs on the disc.
automatically and closes the flip screen. The radio
Recording your own CD on a home computer at a lower
selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recog- •
write speed will result in a more consistent quality.
nized, and starts playing the first track. The display
• Subfolders recorded on your own CD on a home
shows “Reading...” during this process.
computer will also be recognized.
Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA) 61
Removing a Disc From the Radio
1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE hard-key.
NOTE:
When a disc is inserted, the appropriate mode is automatically selected once the disc is recognized.
2. The disc is ejected and can be removed.
Scan Search
NOTE:
Touch the SCAN soft-key.
If the disc is not removed within approximately ten
seconds, the unit pulls it back into the slot (park position). The disc may be ejected when the ignition is OFF. The individual tracks of the disc will be played in
3. Press the OPEN/CLOSE hard-key to close the display. succession for ten seconds each.
The display will close automatically within 30 seconds Select the STOP SCAN soft-key to stop the scan function.
after the disc is removed.
Next Track
Selecting Disc Mode
Press the SEEK up hard-key. The next track on the disc is
Toggle between the media and the radio menus by played. Once the last track has been reached in the
pressing the RADIO/MEDIA hard-key. The disc mode forward direction, the unit will loop back to the first
can be selected by touching the Disc tab soft-key.
track.
3
62 Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA)
Previous Track
Displaying the Elapsed Title Time
Pressing the SEEK down hard-key plays the previous The elapsed title time of the current playing track is
track. If the first track has been reached in the backward displayed in the left center of the screen.
direction, the unit will switch from the first track to the
Select Title from List
last track. If a track has been playing for more than one
Select TRACKS to display a list of the
second when the SEEK down hard-key is pressed, the
titles of the currently playing disc. Select
unit will skip back to the beginning of the current track.
the desired track you wish to play.
Fast Forward Track
Select TRACKS to hide the list.
Touch and hold the Fast Forward soft-key. The
audio will be heard at a reduced level while going
Disc Info
through the track in this mode. Stop the fast-forward by
Select INFO to display title and album artwork
releasing the Fast Forward soft-key.
in the right half of the screen.
Rewind Track
Touch and hold the Fast Reverse soft-key. The
audio will be heard at a reduced level while going
through the track in this mode. Stop the fast reverse by
releasing the Fast Reverse soft-key.
Select INFO again to display title, artist, album
and genre information in the right half of the
screen.
Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA) 63
Select INFO again to hide the information.
Gracenote® Music Recognition Technology
This navigation radio is equipped with the Gracenote®
Music Recognition Service, with an embedded database
to look up album, song title, genre and artist information.
Data will be found for most Audio CDs (CDA discs).
Data will not be found for DVDs or data discs (those with
MP3 or WMA files).
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote® is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content
delivery. For more information visit www.gracenote.com.
3
64 Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA)
Copying Complete Disc to Hard-Drive
Read about copying selective songs in the Hard Disk
Drive section of this manual.
Insert an Audio-CD or a disc with MP3 or WMA files.
Touch the COPY soft-key to start the copy
process.
Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA) 65
The copy progress is shown in the display. It is possible
to listen to radio modes during this process. Copying
time is greater than 5x the normal playback rate.
Touch the STOP COPY soft-key to stop the
copy process at any time.
Select Repeat Folder to repeat all songs in the currently
playing folder (MP3/WMA disc only). Touch the Repeat
Folder soft-key again to stop the repeat mode.
Playing a MP3/WMA Disc
1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE hard-key once.
2. With the printed side upwards, insert the disc into the
disc slot of the radio. The radio pulls the disc in
automatically and closes the flip screen. The radio
While in disc mode with audio disc inserted, press the
selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recogMENU hard-key to access the Disc Menu.
nized, and starts playing the first track. The display
Select Random to play the titles on the disc in random
shows “Reading...” during this process.
order. Select Random again to turn Random off.
Disc Menu
Select Rpt. TRK to repeat the currently playing title.
Touch the Rpt. TRK soft-key again to stop the repeat
mode.
3
66 Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA)
A MP3/WMA disc may contain audio files in a folder
structure. The folder, if any, is shown in the list view.
Touch the TRACKS soft-key if the list is not displayed.
3. Touch the soft-key with a folder symbol to open a
folder.
Touch the UP soft-key to go up one folder.
Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA) 67
Playing a Video DVD
NOTE:
Viewing a DVD video on the radio screen is not available
in all states/provinces, and the vehicle must be stopped,
and the shifter must be in the PARK position for vehicles
with automatic transmission. In vehicles with manual
transmission the parking brake must be engaged also.
3
Insert a video DVD first.
The playback starts automatically after the DVD video is
recognized by the disc drive.
Touch the CHAPTERS soft-key to display a list of available chapters or tracks. Touch a chapter or track soft-key
in the list to start playback from the selected section.
Touch the VIDEO soft-key to view the video on the
screen.
68 Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA)
Touch the cursor arrow soft-keys to select the title you
If you insert a DVD video disc that contains a top menu, want to view, then touch the ENTER soft-key to start
playback.
a menu may appear.
Touch the MOVE CONTROLS soft-key to move
the controls to the right part of the screen.
Touch the CLOSE CONTROLS soft-key to close
the DVD Menu Controls.
DVD Menu Controls
Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA) 69
DVD Playback Controls
In video playback mode, touch anywhere on the screen to
show the DVD playback controls.
Touch the REVERSE soft-key during playback to
fast reverse playback.
Touch the FORWARD soft-key during playback to
fast forward playback.
Touch the NEXT soft-key to locate succeeding chapters or
tracks.
Touch the PAUSE soft-key to pause playback.
Touch the STOP soft-key to stop playback.
Touch the PREV soft-key to start playback from the
beginning of the current chapter or track. When you
press twice in quick succession, playback starts from the
beginning of the preceding chapter or track.
Touch the MOVE CONTROLS soft-key to move
the controls to the right part of the screen.
Touch the CLOSE CONTROLS soft-key to close
the DVD MENU Controls.
3
70 Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA)
In the DVD Setup menu you may select Menu Language,
While in disc mode with a DVD inserted, press the Audio Language, Subtitle, Camera Angle, Aspect Ratio,
and Brightness settings by pressing the corresponding
MENU hard-key to access the DVD Video Menu.
soft-key. Some of the soft-keys are disabled if the inserted
disc does not support the functionality.
DVD Video Menu
Disc Skipping
Skipping is typically caused by a damaged (scratched)
disc. This will result in a ten second jump forward until
the damaged area is passed.
Temperature Protection
If the temperature of the disc reader during operation
becomes too high, a popup message will inform the user
of an over temperature situation. The unit switches to
radio mode until the disc reader temperature has
Touch the DVD Setup soft-key to access the DVD Setup dropped to a normal level.
menu.
Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA) 71
Hard Disk Drive Mode (HDD)
The HDD mode gives you access to the audio files on the
internal hard disk drive. It functions similar to a CD
player, with the exception that the internal HDD can hold
more tracks. It can hold approximately 3,000 four-minute
CD-quality songs.
3
Before using the HDD mode, you will need to copy tracks
to the internal hard drive.
The files will be stored on the internal hard disk drive
and can be used in the HDD mode.
Copy Audio Disc to Hard-Drive
1. Insert a disc. Press the COPY soft-key or follow the
following steps.
2. While in the DISC mode, press the MENU hard-key to
access the Settings Menu.
3. Touch the My Files soft-key.
72 Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA)
4. Select My Music.
5. Touch the Add Music Files to HDD soft-key.
6. Touch the From DISC soft-key in the next screen to
copy music tracks of the inserted disc to the hard disk
drive.
During the copy process, the disc player cannot play
audio.
Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA) 73
Copy WMA/MP3 Files to Hard-Drive
You can copy MP3 and WMA formatted compressed
audio files from a disc or via USB (e.g., USB stick).
It is recommended to sort music files into folders.
3
The copy progress is shown in the display.
It is possible to listen to radio modes during this process.
Copying time is greater than 5x the normal playback rate.
NOTE:
When copying CD Audio to HDD, audio files are converted from CD Audio to WMA. DVD-Audio cannot be
copied to the HDD.
74 Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA)
Songs located in the root level (top level) of the disc or Selective Song Copying from Disc
USB device are displayed in a folder named Disc (or the You can select specific songs on a WMA/MP3 disc using
physical disc name) for disc media or USB or USB sticks. the following procedure:
Once the songs are copied, the playlist will be named
Disc_Playlist (for Disc) or USB_Playlist (for USB stick).
For the example above the list on the HDD will show the
following:
<Disc Name>
• Song 1.mp3 (First song in Playlist 1)
• Song 2.mp3 (Second song in Playlist 1)
• Song 3.wma (Third song in Playlist 1)
Disc_Playlist
• Song 1.mp3 (First song in Playlist 2)
• Song 2.mp3 (Second song in Playlist 2)
• Song 3.mp3 (Third song in Playlist 2)
1. While in the DISC mode, press the MENU hard-key to
access the Settings menu.
Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA) 75
3
2. Touch the My Files soft-key.
3. Select My Music.
76 Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA)
4. Touch the Add Music Files soft-key.
5. Touch the From DISC soft-key in the next screen .
6. Select the folders or titles you would like to copy, by
touching the checkbox.
A red check mark indicates the selected songs and/or
folders. Touch the ALL soft-key to select all files and
folders at once.
Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA) 77
NOTE:
Copying from USB
You may touch a folder icon, to open the folder and select
1. Insert a USB device.
specific songs inside the folder.
7. Touch the SAVE soft-key to start the copy process.
The copy process is shown on the display. It is possible to
listen to radio modes during this process.
3
If you unplug or eject the media before the copying
process is finished, the process will be interrupted. You
may restart the copying process by repeating the steps
above.
Wait until the radio starts playing the music from the
USB device.
78 Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA)
Touch the COPY FROM USB soft-key.
NOTE:
You may touch a folder icon, to open the folder and select
specific songs inside the folder.
3. Touch the SAVE soft-key to start the copy process.
2. Select the folders or titles you would like to copy.
A red check mark indicates the selected songs and/or The copy process is shown on the display. It is possible to
folders. Touch the ALL soft-key to select all files and listen to radio modes during this process.
folders at once.
Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA) 79
Playing Audio Files from an external USB device
You can play songs directly from an external USB device,
by connecting the device to the radio, or to the secondary
USB port (if equipped, typically located in the glove box
or center console). The radio will find the music files and
starts playing automatically.
3
NOTE:
Refer to www.DriveUconnect.com for device compatibility list and functionality support.
Playing Audio Files from the Hard Disk Drive
Press the RADIO/MEDIA hard-key and select the HDD
tab. You can play songs directly from the internal hard
disk drive.
Touch the SEARCH/BROWSE soft-key to select an available category.
The navigation radio can sort the files by artist, by album,
by song, by genre, from a folder, or from Favorites.
80 Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA)
1. For this example, touch the Albums soft-key.
2. Touch a soft-key with the desired album name to play
a playlist.
Touch the PLAY ALL ALBUMS soft-key to play all
available playlists.
Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA) 81
Next Track
Fast Forward Track
Press the SEEK up hard-key. The next track of the current
Touch and hold the Fast Forward soft-key. The
playlist is played. Once the last track has been reached in
audio will be heard at a reduced level while going
the forward direction, the unit will loop back to the first through the track in this mode. Stop the fast forward by
track.
releasing the Fast Forward soft-key.
Previous Track
Rewind Track
Press the SEEK down hard-key. The previous track of the
current playlist is played. If the first track has been
reached in the backward direction, the unit will switch
from the first track to the last track. If a track has been
playing for more than 1 second when the SEEK down
hard-key is pressed, the unit will skip back to the
beginning of the current track.
Touch and hold the Fast Reverse soft-key. The
audio will be heard at a reduced level while going
through the track in this mode. Stop the fast reverse by
releasing the Fast Reverse soft-key.
Displaying the Elapsed Title Time
The elapsed title time of the current playing track is
displayed on the left side of the screen.
3
82 Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA)
HDD Menu
Favorite Playlists on the Hard Disk Drive
While in HDD mode, press the MENU hard-key to access
the HDD Menu.
Shuffle
The shuffle function plays random tracks from the hard
disk drive. Touch the Shuffle soft-key to switch the
random play function on or off. A red check mark
indicates the shuffle function is active.
Repeat Track
The repeat track function repeats the currently played
track. Touch the Rpt. TRK soft-key to switch the repeat
You may save links to favorite playlists/folders in the
track function on or off.
Favorite list.
A red check mark indicates the repeat track function is
active.
Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA) 83
3
1. Touch the Favorites soft-key to display a list of favorite 2. Touch one of the ADD FAVORITE soft-keys.
playlists.
84 Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA)
3. You may favor an artist, an album, a genre, or a 4. Select the desired album. You may use the A to Z
playlist (folder). For this example select the Albums
soft-key to navigate faster through very long lists.
category.
Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA) 85
NOTE:
The link to the favorite playlist will be removed after a
playlist was removed from the My Playlists menu. Refer
to Editing Playlists on the Hard Disk Drive in this
manual.
You may now edit the list by touching the EDIT soft-key,
or exit the list by touching the EXIT soft-key.
A link to the selected Album is now saved in the Favorite
Playlists list.
You may save up to 12 favorites.
3
86 Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA)
Editing Track Info on the Hard Disk Drive
1. While in the HDD mode, touch the EDIT INFO
soft-key.
2. The song information is displayed and can be edited.
You may change the artist, the name, the album, the
track order, the genre, and the folder.
Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA) 87
3
3. For this example scroll down to the last entry and 4. Touch the NEW soft-key to create a new folder.
touch the CHANGE soft-key for the folder name.
88 Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA)
5. Name the folder and touch the SAVE soft-key.
6. The song is now assigned to the new folder. Touch the
EXIT soft-key to switch back to the HDD screen.
Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA) 89
Managing Playlists on the Hard Disk Drive
(Folders)
1. While in the HDD mode, press the MENU hard-key to
access the HDD Menu.
3
3. Select My Music.
2. Touch the My Files soft-key.
90 Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA)
3. Touch the Manage HDD soft-key to access the Manage
HDD menu.
You may now add music files, delete music files, or
rename folders on the HDD.
This menu displays the available space on the hard disk
drive and allows you to delete pictures, music files, and
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the right side of the radio. address book entries.
Deleting All Playlists from the Hard Disk Drive
2. Touch the System Setup soft-key to access the System
Setup menu.
Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA) 91
Importing Pictures
It is possible to import display pictures to the internal
hard disk drive. The pictures can be displayed on the
right half of the radio screen.
3
CAUTION!
It is not possible to copy pictures from a USB device
or CD while the vehicle is in motion.
In the default mode, the vehicle brand logo is displayed
in the right half of the screen. Press the Menu hard-key on
the right side of the radio to access one of the Setting
menus.
92 Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA)
It is recommended to change the picture dimensions on a
PC or Digital Camera to 240 by 158 pixels before the
import.
NOTE:
USB devices (e.g., camera memory USB adaptors, etc.)
must comply with the MSD (Mass Storage Device) standard. This USB terminal can provide power to the
inserted device. The device’s current limitation must be
less or equal to 1A.
1. Insert either a CD or a USB device containing your
pictures.
2. Touch the My Files soft-key to go to the Manage My
Files screen.
Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA) 93
3
3. Touch the My Pictures soft-key to get an overview of 4. Press one of the ADD soft-key.
the currently stored images.
NOTE:
Only JPEG format will be recognized.
94 Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA)
5. Select the type of media inserted.
6. Use the PAGE soft-keys to page through a list of
pictures and press the picture you would like to
import.
7. Confirm your selection by touching the SAVE soft-key.
Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA) 95
3
The imported picture is now available in the Manage My 9. Select this picture by pressing the Picture View softPictures screen.
key. A check mark indicates the currently used picture.
8. In order to display the imported picture in the radio Use the PREV or NEXT soft-key to step through the list of
available pictures.
screen, touch the desired picture soft-key.
Touch the DELETE soft-key to delete the picture from the
hard disk drive.
96 Uconnect® Multimedia (MEDIA)
10. Press the MENU hard-key twice and then touch the The picture is now displayed on the right half of the
Picture View soft-key to enable the picture view.
screen.
Uconnect® Multimedia (REMOTE DEVICES)
CONTENTS
䡵 AUX Mode (If Equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Playing Audio Files from the Mobile Digital
Player Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Select an iPod® Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
▫ iPod® or Smart Player Devices . . . . . . . . . . .101
▫ List Jump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
▫ Next Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
▫ Previous Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
▫ Fast Forward Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
▫ Rewind Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Displaying the Elapsed Title Time . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Scan Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Track Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Switch Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ iPod® Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
▫ Random Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
▫ Repeat Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
4
98 Uconnect® Multimedia (REMOTE DEVICES)
䡵 Bluetooth® Audio Streaming Mode . . . . . . . . . .106 䡵 USB Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Playing Audio Files from the iPod Device . . . .107
▫ Compatible Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
䡵 Video Entertainment System (VES)™. . . . . . . . .108
▫ How to open the cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Receiving Audio/Video from the VES™ . . . . .109
▫ How to Close the Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Sending Audio/Video and controlling
䡵 AUX Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
the VES™. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Uconnect® Multimedia (REMOTE DEVICES) 99
AUX Mode (If Equipped)
Playing Audio Files from the Mobile Digital Player
The AUX mode gives you access to the audio files on an Device
external digital player device. It functions as a remote You can play songs directly from the device. For this
control for the currently connected mobile digital device, example we used an iPod®.
and you can play audio from the device through the
vehicles speaker system. Before using the AUX mode,
you will need to connect your device to the USB connector.
NOTE:
• It is recommended that you use the latest available
software for your digital device. See device manufacturer website for updates.
• Visit www.UconnectPhone.com for a list of compatible
phones/devices.
Touch the TRACKS soft-key to display a list view.
4
100 Uconnect® Multimedia (REMOTE DEVICES)
Touch the soft-key with the desired list item to select and Select an iPod® Category
play the item.
The iPod® can sort the files by playlists, by song names,
by artists, by composers, by genres, by albums, by
Touch the HIDE TRACKS soft-key to hide the list.
podcasts or by audio books.
Touch the SEARCH/BROWSE soft-key to browse by
categories.
NOTE:
• Depending on the amount of songs and on the performance of the digital player device, it may take some
time before the SEARCH/BROWSE soft-key is displayed.
• USB sticks or any other external storage device (hard
drives) do not support the Search/Browse feature.
Touch the Artists soft-key for this example.
Uconnect® Multimedia (REMOTE DEVICES) 101
Touch the ALL soft-key to play songs from all available
artists.
Touch the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN soft-key to navigate through the list of artists.
iPod® or Smart Player Devices
Different generations of players will support different
levels of features (Scan, FF, RW, Play/Pause, etc.). For
devices that do not support these features, the radio will
not display the soft keys.
Please refer to the following websites for a listing of
Touch a soft-key with the desired artist’s name to play supported devices and device specific supported features: www.DriveUconnect.com.
songs from this artist.
4
102 Uconnect® Multimedia (REMOTE DEVICES)
List Jump
If you encounter a very long list, it may be helpful to
touch the A to Z soft-key to go to the List Jump menu.
Touch a soft-key with the desired artist’s name to play
songs from this artist.
For this example we entered the first letter of the desired
artist.
Touch the GO soft-key to jump to the desired artist.
Uconnect® Multimedia (REMOTE DEVICES) 103
Previous Track
Press the SEEK down hard-key. The previous track of the
current folder is played. If the first track has been reached
in the backward direction, the unit will switch from the
first track to the last track. If a track has been playing for
more than 10 seconds when the SEEK down hard-key is
pressed, the unit will skip back to the beginning of the
current track.
Fast Forward Track
Touch the Fast Forward soft-key. The audio will
be heard at a reduced level while going through
Next Track
the track in this mode. Stop the fast forward by releasing
Press the SEEK up hard-key. The next track of the current the Fast Forward soft-key.
folder is played. Once the last track has been reached in
the forward direction, the unit will loop back to the first
track.
4
104 Uconnect® Multimedia (REMOTE DEVICES)
Rewind Track
The individual tracks will be played in succession for
eight seconds each.
Touch the Fast Reverse soft-key. The audio will be
heard at a reduced level while going through the Select the STOP SCAN soft-key to stop the scan function.
track in this mode. Stop the fast reverse by releasing the
Track Info
Fast Reverse soft-key.
Touch the INFO soft-key.
Pause
Information on the currently playing track, if available,
Touch the PAUSE soft-key to pause the playback.
will be displayed on the right half of the screen.
Play
If additional information is available, the NEXT soft-key
Touch the PLAY soft-key to start the playback.
Displaying the Elapsed Title Time
will be displayed. Touch the NEXT soft-key to show the
additional information.
Switch Device
The elapsed title time of the currently playing track is
Touch the DEVICES soft-key to switch to other connected
displayed on the left side of the screen.
devices.
Scan Search
Touch the SCAN soft-key.
Uconnect® Multimedia (REMOTE DEVICES) 105
iPod® Menu
Random Playback
While in iPod® mode, press the MENU hard-key to access The random playback function plays random tracks from
the iPod® mode Menu.
the iPod® device. Touch the Shuffle soft-key to switch the
random play function on or off.
NOTE:
For shuffle/repeat, settings will reflect current setting of A red check mark indicates the random play function is
device being accessed but can be changed accordingly via active.
the radio touch screen.
Repeat Track
The repeat track function repeats the currently played
track. Touch the Rpt. TRK soft-key to switch the repeat
track function on or off.
A red check mark indicates the repeat track function is
active.
4
106 Uconnect® Multimedia (REMOTE DEVICES)
• Not all Bluetooth® devices are capable of Bluetooth®
audio streaming.
The Bluetooth® Audio Streaming mode gives you access
to the audio files on the external Bluetooth® device. The • Not all functions of a Bluetooth® device can be conradio functions as a sound system for the currently
trolled by the radio. See the Bluetooth® device manuconnected Bluetooth® device, and you can play audio
facturer website for updates.
from the device through the vehicles speaker system.
• Different generations of Bluetooth® devices will supBefore using the Bluetooth® Audio Streaming mode, you
port different levels of features (Scan, FF, RW, Play/
will need to pair your compatible Bluetooth® device to
Pause, etc.). For devices that do not support these
the radio. (See Connecting Bluetooth® Devices chapter.)
features, the radio will not display the soft-keys. Please
refer to the following websites for a listing of supNOTE:
ported devices and device specific supported features:
• The files will not be stored on the internal hard disk
www.UconnectPhone.com. See the Bluetooth® device
drive and cannot be used in the HDD mode.
manufacturer website for updates.
Bluetooth® Audio Streaming Mode
• It is recommended that you use the latest available
software for your Bluetooth® device.
Uconnect® Multimedia (REMOTE DEVICES) 107
Playing Audio Files from the iPod Device
You can play songs directly from the iPod device.
4
The Bluetooth® logo indicates a connected Bluetooth®
device. While in AUX mode, touch the DEVICES soft-key
to see the connected devices.
Select the desired device. The Bluetooth® logo indicates
a Bluetooth® device. For this example touch the myPhone soft-key.
108 Uconnect® Multimedia (REMOTE DEVICES)
PLAY
Touch the PLAY soft-key to start the Bluetooth® audio
stream.
Video Entertainment System (VES)™
The navigation radio can remotely control the VES™.
Refer to the VES™ section of the vehicles Owner’s
Manual on the DVD for additional details.
PAUSE
Touch the PAUSE soft-key to pause the Bluetooth® audio
stream.
Uconnect® Multimedia (REMOTE DEVICES) 109
The VES tab becomes available after the VES™ system is
You can play audio from the VES™ through the vehicle’s turned on. Touch the VES MODES soft-key to select the
speaker system. If you have a VES™ with a video player, VES™ audio source.
you can also see the video on the radios display if the
vehicle is parked.
Receiving Audio/Video from the VES™
4
Touch the soft-key with the desired source to play in the
vehicle cabin.
110 Uconnect® Multimedia (REMOTE DEVICES)
Availability of the DVD Player soft-key, the Rear AUX 1 USB Connector
soft-key, and the Rear AUX 2 is based on the type of It is possible to transfer audio files or pictures files to the
VES™ in the vehicle.
navigation radio. Files can be on a disc or on a USB
DVD Player is not available if there is no DVD player in device (e.g., USB stick). The USB connector is covered by
a small cover which protects the connector from dust or
the VES™ or there is no DVD in the player.
damage.
A device must be plugged into the AUX jack of the VES™
to be available.
NOTE:
A disabled soft-key indicates an unavailable source.
Sending Audio/Video and controlling the VES™
• USB on the front of the radio and the one either in the
glove box (if equipped) or center console (if equipped)
have identical functions.
The navigation radio can also control the VES™.
• USB devices (e.g., camera memory USB adaptors, etc.)
must comply with the MSD (Mass Storage Device)
standard. This USB terminal can provide power to the
Refer to the VES™ section of the Owner’s Manual on the
inserted device. The device’s current limitation must
DVD for additional details.
be less or equal to 1A.
All sources are played through the VES™ headphones.
The transfer speed for this USB connector is approximately two megabytes per second.
Uconnect® Multimedia (REMOTE DEVICES) 111
Some player devices cannot be controlled through the How to open the cover
USB connector. Some player devices save music files in
MP4 format, which cannot be played in this radio. Some
copy protected music (e.g., downloads from the internet)
cannot be played on this radio.
NOTE:
Some MP3 players do not allow songs to be copied into
other devices.
Compatible Devices
Please see your authorized dealer or visit
www.DriveUconnect.com for supported devices.
NOTE:
Some MP3 players do not allow songs to be copied into
1. Place finger under the pull arrow.
other devices.
4
112 Uconnect® Multimedia (REMOTE DEVICES)
How to Close the Cover
2. Pull forward.
1. Using your thumb and index finger, grasp the flap.
NOTE:
Notice the hooks (1), which must first be inserted into
The flap is attached and should not be removed! Do not
the frame.
pull the flap off of the frame. Do not use a tool (e.g., screw
driver, nail file, etc.) to open the flap, as this could cause
damage to the face of the radio.
Uconnect® Multimedia (REMOTE DEVICES) 113
4
2. Hook the top hooks (1) into the frame first.
3. Then push on the bottom of the flap to secure in place.
114 Uconnect® Multimedia (REMOTE DEVICES)
CAUTION!
Never force any connector into the ports of your
radio. Make sure your connectors are the identical
shape and size before you connect.
AUX Mode
The AUX connector allows you to connect the headset
output of an audio device (e.g., MP3 player) to the
navigation radio. The audio of the connected device will
then be played through the navigation radio sound
system.
Connect a 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack cable as shown above
(not provided with the radio) to the AUX connector on
the navigation radio and to the earphone connector of
your audio device.
Uconnect® Multimedia (REMOTE DEVICES) 115
The display will switch automatically to the AUX mode Adjust the volume with the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary
when a 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack cable has been connected. knob, or with the volume of the attached device.
The radio screen will revert back to the last tuner mode
The control of the external device (e.g., selecting playlists,
when the cable is unplugged.
play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be provided by the radio;
To change radio modes while the cable is connected to use the device controls instead.
the unit, press the RADIO/MEDIA hard-key until the
NOTE:
AUX tab is displayed on the top of the screen. Touch the
Inserting a mono jack will result in improper audio
AUX tab to return to the AUX mode.
playback.
4
VOICE COMMAND
CONTENTS
䡵 Voice Command Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
▫ Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ AUX Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Changing the Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ AUX Mode (with synced device attached) . . . .124
▫ Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ VES™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Radio Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Radio AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Navigation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Radio FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
▫ Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
5
118 VOICE COMMAND
Voice Command Operation
Voice Command allows you to control your AM and FM
radio, satellite radio, disc player, navigation system, hard
disk drive storage, AUX mode devices (digital music
players) and a memo recorder.
NOTE:
Take care to speak into the Voice Command system as
calmly and normally as possible. The ability of Voice Command to recognize user voice commands may be negatively
affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
hardWhen you press the Voice Command
key, you will hear a beep. The beep is your
signal to give a command.
VOICE COMMAND 119
All other commands can be used depending upon the
NOTE:
If you do not say a command within a few seconds, the active application.
system will present you with a list of options.
For example: If you are in the navigation menu and you
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists are listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from
hard-key, listen for the navigation menu or from the FM radio menu.
options, press the Voice Command
the beep, and say your command.
Certain commands displayed 2 or 3 levels deep can be used
hard-key while the immediately after pressing the VR button for quicker
Pressing the Voice Command
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system result. For exampleѧѧѧѧSat audio > Select Name > Sirius
will be interrupted and you can add or change com- Hits 1ѧ. can be shortened to ѧ..Sat Audio>Sirius Hits 1.
mands. This will become helpful once you start to learn
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
the options.
a normal speaking volume.
NOTE:
The system will best recognize your speech if the winAt any time you can say the words CANCEL, REPEAT,
dows are closed and the heater/air-conditioning fan is
HELP, or MAIN MENU.
set to low.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
menu or screen.
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
5
120 VOICE COMMAND
NOTE:
At any time you can say the words CANCEL, REPEAT,
HELP, or MAIN MENU. These commands are universal
and can be used from any menu or screen. All other
commands can be used depending upon the active
application. When using this system, you should speak
clearly and at a normal speaking volume. The system will
best recognize your speech if the windows are closed and
the heater/air-conditioning fan is set to low. At any point,
if the system does not recognize one of your commands,
you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice ComCommands
hard-key and say HELP or MAIN MENU.
mand
The Voice Command understands two types of comDisplay Menu
mands. Universal commands are available at all times.
In addition to audible help, the navigation radio is able to Local commands are available if the supported radio
display the most important available commands on the mode is active.
screen.
VOICE COMMAND 121
• DISC (to switch to the disc mode)
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command • VES (to switch to the VES™ mode)
hard-key.
• MEMO (to switch to the memo recorder)
2. Say a command (e.g., HELP).
• NAVIGATION (to switch to the navigation mode)
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
• SYSTEM SETUP (to display the system setup menu)
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice ComRadio Menu
mand system is speaking.
You may say RADIO to switch to AM, FM, or SAT.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
key.
hard-
You may say MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu.
• In this mode you can say the following commands:
• RADIO (to switch to the radio mode)
• HARD DRIVE (to switch to the HDD mode)
Say RADIO MENU.
• In this mode you may say the following commands:
• RADIO AM (to switch to the AM band)
• RADIO FM (to switch to the FM band)
• SATELLITE RADIO (to switch to the satellite radio)
5
122 VOICE COMMAND
Radio AM
• PREVIOUS STATION (to select the previous station)
To switch to the AM band say AM or RADIO AM.
• RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)
In this mode you may say the following commands:
• MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
• FREQUENCY (to change the frequency)
Satellite Radio
• NEXT STATION (to select the next station)
To switch to satellite radio mode say SAT or SATELLITE
RADIO. In this mode you may say the following commands:
• PREVIOUS STATION (to select the previous station)
• RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)
• MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band say FM or RADIO FM.
In this mode you may say the following commands:
• FREQUENCY (to change the frequency)
• NEXT STATION (to select the next station)
• STATION (1-250) (to change the station)
• NEXT STATION (to select the next station)
• PREVIOUS STATION (to select the previous station)
• LIST STATIONS (to hear a list of available stations)
• SELECT NAME (to change to the station named)
• RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)
• MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
VOICE COMMAND 123
Disc
• PREVIOUS TRACK (to play the previous track)
To switch to the disc mode say DISC.
• MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
In this mode you may say the following commands:
AUX Mode
• TRACK (1-250) (to change the track)
To switch to the AUX mode say AUX. In this mode you
may say the following commands:
• NEXT TRACK (to play the next track)
• PREVIOUS TRACK (to play the previous track)
• MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
• TRACK (1-250) (to change the track)
• NEXT TRACK (to play the next track)
Hard Drive
• PREVIOUS TRACK (to play the previous track)
To switch to the HDD mode say HARD DRIVE.
• LIST DEVICES (to list connected devices)
In this mode you may say the following commands:
• UCONNECT DEVICE SETUP (to pair a device or to
select a device)
• TRACK (1-250) (to change the track)
• NEXT TRACK (to play the next track)
• MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
5
124 VOICE COMMAND
• PLAY PLAYLIST plus the desired playlist name (to play
playlists by name)
If the attached AUX device is capable of syncing a table of
contents of the attached device to the radio, you may say • PLAY AUDIO BOOK plus the desired audio book
the following additional commands:
name (to play audio books by name)
AUX Mode (with synced device attached)
• PLAY COMMANDS (to display a list of possible voice • PLAY PODCAST plus the desired pod cast name
commands)
(to play pod cast by name)
• PLAY TRACK plus the desired track name (to play • PLAY SIMILAR SONGS (to play similar songs)
songs by track)
VES™
• PLAY ALBUM plus the desired album name (to play
To switch to the VES™ mode say V E S.
songs by album)
In this mode you may say the following commands:
• PLAY ARTIST plus the desired artist name (to play
• VES
songs by artist)
• PLAY GENRE plus the desired genre name (to play • VES REMOTE LOCK (to lock the VES™ remote)
songs by genre)
VOICE COMMAND 125
• During the playback you may press the Voice Command
hard-key to stop playing memos. You proTo switch to the voice recorder mode say MEMO.
ceed by saying one of the following commands:
In this mode you may say the following commands:
• REPEAT (to repeat a memo)
• NEW MEMO (to record a new memo)
• NEXT (to play the next memo)
• PREVIOUS (to play the previous memo)
• During the recording you may press the Voice Com• DELETE (to delete a memo)
hard-key to stop recording. You proceed by
mand
saying one of the following commands:
• DELETE ALL (to delete all memos)
• SAVE (to save the memo)
NOTE:
• CONTINUE (to continue recording)
Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command
• DELETE (to delete the recording)
hard-key first and wait for the beep, before speaking
Memo
• PLAY MEMOS (to play previously recorded memos)
the “barge in” commands.
5
126 VOICE COMMAND
Navigation
To switch to the navigation mode say NAVIGATION.
NOTE:
Not all commands will be available at all times, depending upon the system context.
NOTE:
Read the navigation chapter first to help you understand
the functionality of the available commands.
You may say:
• DESTINATION ENTRY
• GUIDE ME TO A NAME
• STREET ADDRESS
• INPUT COUNTRY
• INPUT STATE
• INPUT CITY NAME
• INPUT STREET NAME
• INPUT HOUSE NUMBER
• INTERSECTION
• POINT OF INTEREST
• FIND NEARBY POI
• FIND POI NEAR DESTINATION
• FIND WITHIN A CITY
• INPUT PHONE NUMBER
• SELECT POI ICONS
• FIND POI (Say POI name if known)
• ADVANCED INPUT
• INPUT ZIP CODE
• INTERSECTION
• CANCEL DESTINATION ENTRY
• RECENT DESTINATIONS
VOICE COMMAND 127
• ROUTING OPTIONS
• GO
• STOP ROUTING
• MUTE GUIDANCE
• REPEAT GUIDANCE
• CHANGE METHOD
• FASTER ROUTE
• SHORTER ROUTE
• TRAVEL INFO
• MAP OPTIONS
• MAP
• ZOOM IN
• ZOOM OUT
• ADDRESS BOOK
• NEW ENTRY
• NAVIGATE TO A NAME
• DELETE
• ERASE ALL
System Setup
To switch to the system setup say SETUP.
You can say:
• LANGUAGE
• ENGLISH
• SPANISH
• FRENCH
• VOICE TRAINING
• HELP SCREEN
• ON
• OFF
• TUTORIAL
5
128 VOICE COMMAND
Voice Training
If the system does not understand the words VOICE
TRAINING:
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect® 1.
Phone system Voice Training feature may be used.
2.
hard-key, say “SYSTEM
1. Press the Voice Command
3.
SETUP” and once you are in that menu then say
“VOICE TRAINING.”
This will train your own voice to the system and will •
improve Command.
Press the MENU hard-key.
Press System Setup.
Press the Voice Command soft-key to access the Voice
Command menu.
Touch the Show Help Screens During Voice Command
Sessions to show or hide the help screens when using
the speech dialog system.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
Uconnect® Phone system. For best results, the Voice • Touch the Reset Voice Command System to Factory
Defaults when you would like to restore the Voice
Training session should be completed when the veCommand system to factory default settings.
hicle is parked, engine running, all windows closed,
and the blower fan switched off.
• Touch the Start Voice Training soft-key to train the
Voice Command system.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
• Touch the Listen to Tutorial soft-key to hear instructions on voice training.
VOICE COMMAND 129
NOTE:
With rolled down windows, the system performance
may be compromised.
In a convertible vehicle, the system performance may be
compromised with roof top down.
The rear view mirror top should be at least a half of an
inch below the overhead console.
5
Uconnect® Phone
CONTENTS
䡵 Phone System Setup – Pairing. . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
6
132 Uconnect® Phone
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in The Uconnect® system is fully integrated with the vehivehicle communications system.
cle’s audio system. The radio display will be used for
visual prompts from the Uconnect® system such as
phone battery status, signal strength, caller ID, and call
type. Uconnect® Phone allows you to dial a phone
number with your cellular phone using simple voice
commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ “Jim” ѧWork” or “Dial” ѧ
“248-555-1212”). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will
automatically mute your radio when using the
Uconnect® Phone system.
Safety advice: While the vehicle is parked, practice the
use of the Uconnect® Phone system until you are familiar
with its functionality.
Uconnect® Phone 133
Phone System Setup – Pairing
6
2. Then touch the System Setup soft-key to get to the
System Setup menu.
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the right side of the
radio.
134 Uconnect® Phone
3. Touch the Device Pairing soft-key to access the Bluetooth This menu lists all paired Bluetooth devices.
Devices menu.
4. Press the PAIR soft-key to start a new pairing.
Uconnect® Phone 135
6
5. You can use the BACK soft-key to switch to the 7. The pairing procedure starts. Refer to the user’s
previous menu.
manual of your Bluetooth phone to complete the
procedure on your phone. During this process you
6. Enter any 4 Digit Security PIN and touch the PAIR
need to enter your Security Pin into the phone.
soft-key again.
136 Uconnect® Phone
8. You will then be asked to set a priority for the paired 9. You may now change the device name.
phone. If there is more than one paired phone availNOTE:
able, the navigation radio will try to connect to the
Note: You can enter up to 20 characters.
phone with the highest priority setting.
10. Touch the SAVE soft-key to confirm the device name.
Uconnect® Phone 137
NOTE:
If the phone book download feature is supported by your
cell phone, only the first 1000 contacts will be automatically copied to the radio. Contacts will be downloaded
from your SIM card first and then copied from your
phones default phone book. The phone book will automatically download upon initial pairing, after the phone
is paired once you may use the download soft-key to
update the phone book in the radio.
6
11. You may rename the device, set it as active phone, if
more than one device is connected, modify the phone
priority, or delete the pairing.
12. Touch the phonebook update soft-key to download
the phone book into the radio.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation
CONTENTS
䡵 General Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ POI Nearby Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ POI in Map Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ Navigation Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ POI by Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ Navigation Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Favorite POI Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ System Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Destination Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
䡵 Navigation Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Overview Destination Entry Screen . . . . . . . .153
▫ Selecting NAV Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Destination Input by Street Address . . . . . . . .154
▫ Inputting Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Changing State/Province and/or Country. . . .154
䡵 Destination Input by POI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Destination Input by Intersection . . . . . . . . . .158
▫ POI Local Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Destination Input by Geo Coordinate . . . . . . .161
7
140 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
▫ Destination Input by Favorite Places. . . . . . . .161
▫ Map Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Destination Input by Address Book . . . . . . . .162
▫ POI Icons on the Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Destination Input by Point on Map . . . . . . . .163
▫ Repeat Navigation Announcement . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Destination Input by Saved Trails. . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Automatic Re-Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Destination Input by Recent Places. . . . . . . . .164
▫ Route Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Destination Input by Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Canceling Route Guidance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Guide Me Home. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Unverified Navigation Database Area . . . . . . .179
▫ Where Am I Now? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Notes on Route Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Emergency Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
䡵 Navigation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
▫ Record New Trail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ Options Before Activating the Route
Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
▫ Route Guidance to a Recorded Trail . . . . . . . .171
䡵 Route Guidance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ Navigation View Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Options During Route Guidance . . . . . . . . . .187
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 141
䡵 Navigation Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 䡵 SiriusXM Traffic by SiriusXM Satellite Radio . . .199
▫ Set Measurement Metric/US . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ SiriusXM Traffic Market Coverage . . . . . . . . .199
▫ Set Default Routing Method . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ Display Traffic Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ GPS Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ Switching SiriusXM Traffic On or Off . . . . . . .202
▫ Guidance Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ Speed and Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
䡵 Map Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ View All Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Map Zoom Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
▫ Dynamic Route Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Map Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
▫ SiriusXM Traffic Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ 3D Map Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
䡵 Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ Minimize Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ Route Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ Add a Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
䡵 Stop Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ Entering/Editing/Deleting an Address . . . . . .206
䡵 Trip Planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Search a Contact in the Address Book . . . . . . .211
7
142 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
General Notes
Navigation Database
The navigation unit is provided with a navigation database on the internal hard drive. The database contains
Your navigation system receives GPS signals from up to
data for the continental USA, some of the major cities in
16 satellites to display the position of your vehicle. Map
Canada, Alaska, parts of Hawaii, and Puerto Rico.
and database information is supplied through a hard disk
drive. A gyroscope and the vehicles speed sensor enable
WARNING!
the system to display the present vehicle position even in
locations where GPS signals may be blocked.
Drive with caution, paying attention to the road,
When you input a destination, the navigation system uses obeying all traffic laws!
System Overview
map data from the hard disk drive to quickly calculate a
System Limitations
route. As you drive along your chosen route, you are
The map data that is included with your system is the
guided with pictorial displays and voice prompts.
most recent available at the time of production. Because
Navigation Software
of changes in streets, neighborhoods, and business locaThis navigation radio requires digital data from a navi- tions, there may be situations where the navigation
gation database. The data in the navigation database is system is not able to route you to your desired destinalicensed from NAVTEQ. Not all roads are digitized.
tion by the entry method you have chosen. If this occurs,
choose another entry method.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 143
Selecting Navigation Mode Press the NAV hard-key to
toggle between Navigation MAIN MENU and Navigation MAP.
Navigation Main Menu
Selecting NAV Main Menu
1. If not already done, press the ACCEPT soft-key to
agree to the navigation disclaimer.
2. Press the NAV hard-key to switch to the navigation
menu and toggle between Map Viewer and Navigation Main Menu.
New Destination
Touch this soft-key when you want to program a destination. (See the Destination Input section for details).
7
144 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
Recent Places
Favorite POI’s
Touch this soft-key when you want to route to a destina- Touch this soft-key when you want to enter a point of
tion you programmed before. (See the Destination Input interest from a preselected favorite POI category list,
which is also available while the vehicle is in motion. (See
section for details).
the Favorite POI section for details).
My Trips
Emergency Info
Touch this soft-key when you want to program or save
trips with multiple destinations. (See the My Trips section Touch this soft-key when you want to route to an
emergency facility near to the current location of your
for details).
vehicle. You may list fire stations, police stations, hospiGuide Me Home
tals and Chrysler dealerships. (See the Emergency Info
Touch this soft-key when you want to route to your home section for details).
destination. (See the Guide Me Home section for details).
Where Am I Now?
Point of Interest
Touch this soft-key when you want to find out where you
Touch this soft-key when you want to route to a point of are, and when you need to search for an available point
interest. (See the POI section for details).
of interest near your current vehicle position. (See the
Where Am I Now section for details).
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 145
It is possible to spell only names contained in the
database. Unavailable letters are in a lighter color and are
Touch this soft-key when you want to display a map of
not selectable. If the desired street name is shown comyour current position. (See the Map Viewer section for
pletely, touch the CONTINUE soft-key to proceed. If
details).
there are only a few choices left, you may touch the LIST
Inputting Information
soft-key to display a list of street names.
MAP
Names (e.g., city names or street names) are entered with IMPORTANT NOTE: Use the space symbol as a space
a smart speller.
between words (e.g., NEW_YORK_CITY).
NOTE:
Touch the DEL soft-key to delete a misspelled letter or
press the NAV hard-key to go back to the Navigation
Main Menu.
NOTE:
Touch the 0-9 soft-key to access numbers, and touch the
MORE... soft-key to access special characters, if needed.
7
146 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
CAUTION!
For your own safety and the safety of others, it is not
possible to use the speller while the vehicle is in
motion.
Destination Input by POI
The Point of Interest database allows you to select a
destination from a list of locations and public places, or
points of interest (POI).
Press the NAV hard-key to access the NAV Main Menu.
A point of interest (POI) can be found in different ways;
Close to the current vehicle position (POI Local Area),
close to the currently active destination (Nearby Destination), within the map database (POI in Map Area), by POI
name, by phone number, and within a city.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 147
POI Local Area
2. Touch the NEARBY POI soft-key.
For this example we will continue by entering a gas
station close to the vehicle location.
NOTE:
Nearest POI can also be found by simply selecting “Point
1. While you are in the NAV - Main Menu touch the of Interest” instead of the “Where Am I Now?” soft key.
Where AM I Now? soft-key. The navigation radio
displays your current location on a map, and the
location information (e.g., latitude, longitude, elevation, road name, city, state, if available).
7
148 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
Select a POI category. For this example select Gasoline.
3. Select one of the Gas Stations from the list and confirm
your route by touching the GO soft-key in the confirmation screen.
POI Nearby Destination
For this example we will continue by entering a gas
station close to the currently entered destination.
NOTE:
Some categories may be disabled while the vehicle is in
motion.
The POI list shows the POI address, the distance to the
POI (direct aerial distance), and a directional arrow.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 149
1. While the system is in guidance mode, touch the
OPTIONS soft-key.
3. Touch the Find POI Near destination soft-key and
select a category. Pick a gas station from the list and
confirm the destination. This is the same process as
2. Touch the Destination Info soft-key to select the Desdescribed in the POI Local Area section.
tination Info menu.
7
150 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
POI in Map Area
POI by Type
To select a POI from anywhere on the navigation data- To select a POI by type, select Point of Interest in the NAV –
base map area, select Point of Interest in the NAV – Main Main Menu screen, and then touch the Select Type from List
Menu screen.
soft-key.
Touch the soft-key with the desired category to display a
list of Points of Interest.
NOTE:
The length of the lists are limited to five pages while the
vehicle is in motion.
Favorite POI Categories
NOTE:
For your safety, the number of displayed POIs may be
limited in certain screens, while the vehicle is in motion.
You can find POIs by the POI name, by type, by the For easier access to POIs while the vehicle is in motion,
you may define your own POI category list.
phone number, or by entering a city name.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 151
The Favorite POIs screen shows the available categories.
1. Touch the Favorite POIs soft-key in the NAV – Main
2. You may select ADD to add more categories.
Menu screen.
You may select EDIT LIST to either clear all, clear
selected, or move POI categories in the list.
7
152 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
Destination Input
Press the NAV hard-key to access the NAV Main Menu.
Select CLEAR ALL to delete all categories from the list.
Edit a category soft-key by touching the soft-key with the
category you would like to edit. If you select Clear in the
next screen the soft-key will be removed from the list. If
you select Move, you may change the position of the
soft-key in the list.
Touch the New Destination soft-key to get to the Destination Input Screen
NOTE:
Once you start the destination input you can touch the
CANCEL soft-key to cancel the destination input process.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 153
Overview Destination Entry Screen
Point on Map allows quick and easy selection of a
destination directly from the Map screen. By selecting a
street segment or icon, you can quickly enter a destination without the need to input the city name or street.
Use Saved Trail to access previously saved trails. Review
the Trails section in this manual to learn more about
trails.
A Street Address or a street name with house number.
NOTE:
If you select a street without knowing a house number or
the house number cannot be entered, the navigation
radio will guide you to the closest end location on the
At this point, you need to decide what type of destination entered street.
you would like to enter.
Intersection allows you to enter two street names.
Use Favorite Place and Address Book to access previously saved addresses or locations. Review the Address Use City Center if you want directions to a particular
Book section in this manual to learn more about the city. The navigation system will calculate a route with the
destination at the center of the city.
address book.
7
154 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
Geo Coordinates A geo coordinate is a coordinate used
in geography. You can determine a geo coordinate with
the help of a handheld GPS receiver, a map, or the
navigation system.
Destination Input by Street Address
For this example we will continue by entering the following address 2101 CONSTITUTION AVE NW, WASHINGTON D.C., DC 20037, U.S.A.
1. Touch the Street Address soft-key to get to the Street
Address menu.
This menu shows the default country and state settings.
Changing State/Province and/or Country
If your destination is not in the displayed state and/or
country, either enter a city name by touching the USA
soft-key in the second row, or the ZIP code (if known), by
touching the USA soft-key in the third row of the screen.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 155
You can change the state/province and/or country temporarily for the current destination input by touching the
STATE, PROVINCE, or COUNTRY soft-key in this menu.
NOTE:
• A pop-up will appear asking whether or not you
would like the new state, province, or country to be the
default.
• It is recommended to change the default state and/or
default country, if you plan to enter more than one
destination in the destination area (e.g., vacation,
Enter W into the speller and select WASHINGTON D.C.,
business travel, etc.).
DC from the list. Once selected, a CHANGE soft-key will
1. If the COUNTRY is not set to USA, touch COUNTRY, appear in the lower right corner of the screen. Touch
and touch the USA soft-key for this example.
CHANGE to confirm your selection.
2. For this example touch STATE and change the state to
Washington D.C.
7
156 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
3. Once the country is set to USA and the state is set to
WASHINGTON D.C., touch the WASHINGTON D.C.
soft-key in the first row of the Street Address screen.
This will allow you to input the street name in
Washington D.C.
Touch the C soft-key in the speller, to enter the first letter
of the street name (CONSTITUTION AVE NW). In the
upper right corner the number of possible roads decreases.
4. Touch the LIST soft-key to display a list of possible
street names. Select CONSTITUTION AVE NW from
the list to get to the Input Number menu.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 157
The speller displays only numbers contained in the
digital map.
5. In this example we have entered 2101 as the house
number. Touch the CONTINUE soft-key to get to the
Confirm Route screen.
If you touch the CONTINUE soft-key without entering a
number, the navigation system will guide you to a
section of the entered street which is the closest to your
current location.
In the Confirm Route screen the navigation radio displays the complete address, a map of the destination
area, and the current routing method for you to verify.
7
158 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
NOTE:
Destination Input by Intersection
• If the displayed address is not the desired address, you
can either touch the BACK soft-key in the upper left
corner of the screen to step back to the previous
screens, press the NAV hard-key to start over from the
NAV - Main Menu, or touch CANCEL to cancel the
destination input.
For this example we will continue by entering the following intersection: Kaufman Ln and Bridwell Dr, in Louisville, Kentucky.
• Pressing the Option soft key while in the Confirm
Screen will also allow you to select alternative routes.
You will have an option to choose 1 of 2 quickest
routes or 1 of 2 shortest routes (depending on the route
method currently selected).
6. Touch the GO soft-key to activate the route guidance.
To read more about the OPTIONS soft-key in this
menu, see the NAV Options section of this manual.
1. From the Destination Entry menu touch the Intersection soft-key to get to the Find Intersection menu.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 159
NOTE:
3. Touch the Enter Name of Street 1 soft-key to enter the
If Kentucky is not your default state refer to the change
first street.
state/province and/or country section to learn how to
4. Enter “Kaufman Ln” into the speller and confirm the
change state/province and/or country.
name.
It is possible to select the intersection within the whole
country, a city, or a ZIP code area.
2. For this example touch the Within KENTUCKY soft-key.
7
5. Touch the Enter Name of Street 2 soft-key to enter the
second street. The navigation radio will display a list
of possible cross streets of the initially entered street.
160 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
6. Select “Bridwell Dr” for this example.
If you wish to change your mind and prefer to select a
different cross street, you can touch the soft-key with the
cross street name to select another cross street.
7. Touch CONTINUE to confirm the intersection and
touch GO in the Confirm Route To screen to start the
route guidance.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 161
To enter a Geo Coordinate as a destination, simply touch
NOTE:
If the first street of the intersection was not entered the Lat: soft-key and enter the latitude, then touch the
Long: soft-key to enter the longitude.
accurately, the second street may not be found.
Destination Input by Geo Coordinate
Destination Input by Favorite Places
Touch the Geo Coordinate soft-key in the Destination Touch the Favorite Places soft-key in the Destination
Entry screen.
Entry Menu.
NOTE:
The Favorite Places soft-key is disabled if the favorite
places memory is empty. To fill the favorite places
memory, you must save a location as a Favorite Place
from the Where Am I Now? Menu or by saving current
destination in the NAV options screen in after a destination has already been entered.
7
162 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
Destination Input by Address Book
Touch the Address Book soft-key in the Destination Entry
screen.
Touch the soft-key with the name of the desired destination
and confirm the route with GO to start the route guidance.
Touch the EDIT LIST soft-key to delete either all or single
entries off the Favorite Places list. To exit the Edit Select a folder or touch SEARCH to search for the desired
Favorite Places menu touch the EXIT soft-key. To go back contact to enter the destination (see the Address Book
to the Main Menu touch the back soft-key in the upper section in this manual for more information).
left corner of the screen.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 163
Destination Input by Point on Map
This feature allows quick and easy selection of a destination directly from the map screen. By selecting a street
segment or POI icon, you can quickly enter a destination
without the need to input the city name or street.
NOTE:
This feature is also available while the vehicle is in
motion.
1. Touch the MAP soft-key in the NAV - Main Menu to
access the map.
After touching the map on the screen, a set of arrows
appears.
2. Use the arrows to navigate the center of the cross over
the desired destination.
3. Either touch the SELECT soft-key to select the destination, or touch the POIs soft-key to see a list of POIs
in the selected area.
7
164 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
See the Record New Trail section in this manual for more
Touch the Saved Trails soft-key in the Destination Entry information.
menu.
Destination Input by Recent Places
Destination Input by Saved Trails
Touch the Recent Places soft-key in the NAV Main Menu.
NOTE:
The Saved Trails soft-key is disabled if the trails memory
is empty. To fill the trails memory, you must save a trail.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 165
Touch the soft-key with the name of the desired destina- 2. Press the Voice Command
hard-key, wait for the
tion and confirm the route with GO to start the route
beep. Say INPUT STREET.
guidance.
The radio will respond: “for Michigan. Please say the
Touch the EDIT LIST soft-key to delete either all or single name of the street.”
entries off the recent destination list. To exit the Edit
3. Wait for the beep and say, LOLLY POP STREET
Recent Destinations menu touch the EXIT soft-key. To go
(example).
back to the Main Menu touch the Back soft-key in the
The radio will respond: “Do you mean Lolly Pop Street?”
upper left corner of the screen.
Destination Input by Voice
4. Wait for the beep and say YES.
Read the Voice Command System section for details.
The radio will respond: “Line one. Now, do you want to
enter a city?”
hard-key. Wait for the
1. Press the Voice Command
5. Wait for the beep and say YES.
beep and say NAVIGATION.
The navigation radio will respond, saying: “Navigation.” The radio will respond: “For Lolly Pop Street. The only
The navigation radio has switched to the navigation city that could be found is Westland, Michigan. Do you
mode and is now ready to receive navigation-related want to use this city?”
voice commands. For this example, the default country is 6. Wait for the beep and say, YES.
set to the U.S. and the default state is set to Michigan.
7
166 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
The radio will respond: “City name has been accepted. Guide Me Home
Now, do you want to enter a house number?”
Touch the Guide Me Home soft-key in the NAV - Main
Menu, and touch the GO soft-key to confirm the route to
7. Wait for the beep and say NO.
the home address saved in the address book.
The radio will respond: “Now, do you want to start route
See the Getting Started and Address Book section in this
guidance?”
manual for information on how to save, clear, or edit the
8. Wait for the beep and say YES.
home address.
The radio will start the route guidance to Lolly Pop
Where Am I Now?
Street, in Westland, Michigan.
While you drive towards the destination, you may press The Where Am I Now? menu displays location informathe Voice Command hard-key, wait for the beep and say tion for the current vehicle position.
TRAVEL INFO.
Touch the NEARBY POI soft-key to search for a local POI.
The radio will respond with your estimated time of Touch the SAVE LOCATION soft-key to save the current
arrival and the distance to the entered destination.
location in the Saved Locations memory.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 167
1. Touch the Emergency Information soft-key in the
NAV - Main Menu.
2. Select hospitals, police stations, fire departments or
dealerships.
3. Read and confirm the disclaimer.
WARNING!
Save the current location in the Favorite Places folder of
the Saved Locations memory, in the Address Book, in the
My Trips memory, or as the home address.
Emergency Info
Use this function to locate emergency Points of Interest,
e.g. hospitals/medical facilities, police stations, fire departments, or dealerships.
The distances displayed in the Emergency facility
lists are aerial distances. In some cases the road
distance to the facility may vary. Actual road distances will be displayed after a specific destination is
selected and the route planning is completed. In
unverified areas the route selected may not be the
quickest route to your destination!
7
168 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
Touch the CALL 911 soft-key to dial 911 with a cellular
phone connected via Uconnect® Phone. See the Uconnect®
Phone section in this manual for more information on
Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE:
The Start/Stop Trail button is not visible during and shortly
after a route guidance announcement (intersection zoom)
and the map view settings are set to Turn by Turn.
Record New Trail
The trail function is a feature that allows you to log and
save a trail in non-digitized areas.
NOTE:
It is recommended to start the trail into a non-digitized
area from a digitized road.
1. Touch the MAP soft-key in the NAV Main Menu to
access the map.
NOTE:
The Start/Stop Trail button is in the lower right corner of
the screen if a route guidance is active and the map view 2. Touch the Record Trail soft-key in the lower right
corner of the map viewer screen to record a route.
settings are set to Turn List.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 169
3. Touch the Stop Trail soft-key to stop the trail recording.
The Record Trail soft-key will switch to the Stop Trail
soft-key and the trail appears as a yellow line on the map
screen while you drive along a route. Maneuver points
(bread crumbs) are marked as yellow dots. The start
point is marked with a green dot, the stop point is
marked with a red dot.
• Touch Discard Current Trail to discard the trail and
stop the recording.
• Touch Continue Recording Trail to continue the
recording.
4. Touch Stop and Save Current Trail.
7
170 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
6. Touch the EXIT soft-key to save the trail recording
without changing the name.
The trail recording is now saved in the Saved Trails
Memory.
NOTE:
• You can save up to 12 trails. If the trail memory is full,
you must discard one of the previous recorded trails in
order to record a new trail.
• The Start/Stop Trail button is not visible during intersection zoom and when the map view settings are set
to Turn by Turn.
The trail will be named with time and date of the
recording.
5. Touch the Change Name soft-key to edit the trail
name.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 171
Route Guidance to a Recorded Trail
The Saved Trails Memory is accessible in the Destination
Entry menu. The route guidance will allow you a choice
to route to the start or end of the pre-recorded trail.
Touch the Saved Trails soft-key.
7
172 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
You may touch the EDIT soft-key to change the trail Once you arrive at the destination (green dot, destination
name or to delete trails from the My Saved Trails list.
icon), the route guidance will end.
Select the desired trail.
Touch the trail point soft-key to toggle
between the start-point and the endpoint of a trail.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 173
Route Guidance
After starting route guidance, the system calculates the
route and announces: “Follow the arrows on the display.”
You will receive navigation recommendations by voice
messages and screen displays.
You may now follow the trail on the screen. The trail will
be displayed until you touch the STOP TRAIL soft-key in
the Navigation Main Menu.
7
174 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
Navigation View Settings
Press the MENU hard-key to select the NAV Menu.
Touch the Turn by Turn soft-key to display turn arrows
and intersection zooms on the right half of the screen.
Touch the Turn List soft-key to display a list of upcoming
turns on the right half of the screen.
NOTE:
Touch the Map View soft-key in any Radio Menu screen
to enable the map view mode, where the navigation map
or turn-by-turn navigation can be displayed on the right
half of the radio screen (see Display Settings for more
information).
Touch the Full Map soft-key to display a full map during
route guidance.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 175
• Touch the Next Turn Info soft-key to show or hide the
next turn soft-key and the next turn information bar.
Press the Map Items soft-key in the NAV Menu to access
the Display Items on Map menu.
• Touch the Current Road Info soft-key to show or hide
the NOW ON soft-key and the current road information bar.
Map Items
• Touch the Time Remaining soft-key to show or hide
the estimated time remaining until you reach your
destination.
• Touch the Time of Arrival soft-key to show or hide the
estimated time of arrival at your destination.
Touch the SAVE soft-key to save your changes.
POI Icons on the Map
The navigation radio is able to display available points of
• Touch the Map Buttons soft-key to show or hide the interest on the map. Touch the Select POI Icons soft-key
Zoom, Map Heading, 2D/3D View and the Button to show a list of point of interest icons.
Minimize soft-key.
7
176 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 177
Touch the icon soft-key to show or hide an icon on the Repeat Navigation Announcement
map.
Touch the RPT soft-key in the upper right corner of the
navigation screen to hear the current navigation announcement.
7
178 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
Automatic Re-Routing
In the left half of the screen, the current position and the
current routing method are displayed.
If you miss a turn while navigating, the navigation radio
The Take Detour soft-key will allow you to calculate a
will automatically adjust your route.
different route.
Route Options
Touch the Find Nearby POI soft-key to search for a local
After pressing the OPTIONS soft-key in the Route GuidPOI.
ance Menu, the following information is displayed:
The Destination Info soft-key displays destination information.
The View Turn List soft-key lists streets utilized for the
current route.
Touch the Save Destination to save the destination address.
The Change Method soft-key will allow you to change
the routing method.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 179
Canceling Route Guidance
Unverified Navigation Database Area
The current route guidance can be aborted at any time by Unverified areas are roads that are included in the
pressing the STOP ROUTING soft-key in the NAV-Main database but have not been verified.
Menu.
Route guidance in an unverified area is different from the
guidance you receive in a detailed, verified area. When
traveling in an unverified area, turn-by-turn guidance,
voice prompts and a route are only route guidance
suggestions.
In an unverified map area, the navigation system is
unaware of turning restrictions e.g. one way roads, or
where turns are not permitted.
7
Touch the YES soft-key to confirm the cancellation, or
touch the NO soft-key to keep the route guidance.
180 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
Notes on Route Guidance
During navigation you will receive voice recommendations to help guide you. The following explains some
guidance messages you may receive.
WARNING!
Danger of Accident! DO NOT IGNORE TRAFFIC
LAWS. If a driving recommendation contradicts the
traffic laws, the laws ALWAYS take precedence!
NOTE:
A warning message may appear on the screen every time
you enter an area with unverified navigation database
data.
“Make a U-turn if possible.” - You are driving in the
wrong direction and should turn around at the earliest
legal opportunity.
“Follow the arrows on the display.” - This display tells
you that you are currently in an area, such as a parking
lot, garage, etc., that is not contained on the digital street
map. The arrow indicates the actual geographic direction
to the destination.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 181
“Please take a left in 500 feet.” - The red arrow points in
the direction you should turn. The dot indicates a ma- “Follow the road.” - You should continue driving on the
current road for the distance shown.
neuver point.
“Prepare to take a left” or “Keep left in one mile.” - Keep
left does not mean to use HOV lanes or express lanes. You
should note that there is an upcoming turn and prepare
7
182 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
to make any lane changes needed to safely make the turn. NOTE:
As always, road safety must be observed when making a At intersections and traffic circles, only the ends of the
roads to be passed are displayed.
lane change.
“Take the second exit to the right.” - This means to pass
the first exit after this announcement is given.
“Take the second turn on the right.” - This arrow shows
you which exit you should take from a traffic circle.
“Keep right in half a mile.” - ”Keep right” means that the
street will fork and you should follow the indicated
direction.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 183
“You have reached your destination.” - The specified
destination has been reached and route guidance is terminated. The display will switch back after few seconds.
Navigation Options
Options Before Activating the Route Guidance
Before confirming the route with the GO soft-key, it is
possible to select options different from the default route
settings.
Touch the OPTIONS soft-key in the Confirm Route
screen to get to the NAV Options screen.
Press View Route Choices to view alternate routing.
7
184 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
Press Simulate Route to simulate the route.
Touch the Destination Info soft-key in the NAV Options
menu to find a map of the destination area, the complete View Turn List to see a list of turns on the route.
address or coordinates of your destination.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 185
Use the page soft-keys to scroll through the list of turns. Touch the Avoid This Road soft-key to avoid the selected
The turn soft-keys display the length of the route seg- turn in the list. The route will be re-calculated, if an
ment, direction of turn, and the name of the street.
alternate route is possible.
Touch a street in the list either to avoid the street or to Touch the Show This Turn soft-key to display a map of
preview the turn in the map view.
the area surrounding the selected turn.
7
186 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
Touch the Find POI Near Destination soft-key to exchange the destination with a POI near to the desired
destination. Read more about POI in the POI section of
this manual.
The turn will be displayed in the center of the map. Touch
the NEXT TURN soft-key to show a map of the area close
to the next turn in the turn list, touch the PREV TURN
soft-key to show a map of the area close to the previous
turn in the turn list.
Press Save Destination to save the destination address.
Touch the Back soft-key to go back to the Turn List menu. Touch the Change Method soft-key in the NAV Options
menu to change the default routing method.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 187
Options During Route Guidance
During active route guidance the View Route Choices
and Simulate Route soft-keys are replaced by the Take
Detour and Find Nearby POI soft-keys.
After you touch one of the method soft-keys in this
menu, the CHANGE soft-key will appear for confirmation of the method change.
NOTE:
Since toll roads, tunnels and ferries are built for the
purpose of shortening travel distances, avoiding these Touch the Take Detour soft-key to access the Detour From
Route menu.
road types may increase distance and travel time.
7
188 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
Press the Find Nearby POI soft-key to search for a local
POI.
Press Save Destination soft-key to save the destination
address.
Navigation Default Settings
Touch the NAV Settings soft-key in the Navigation - Main
Menu to select the preferred measurement, set default
routing method, view GPS information, and adjust guidance
prompt volume.
Select a distance and touch the GO soft-key to confirm.
The navigation will avoid the roads in the turn list for the
selected distance and calculate an alternate route.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 189
Set Measurement Metric/US
Set Default Routing Method
Mark or unmark route parameters and then touch the
From the Navigation Main Menu touch NAV Settings SAVE soft-key (not shown) to confirm the changes. Press
and then select either mi/ft or km/m.
the NAV hard-key to cancel without change.
NOTE:
Avoiding freeways, toll roads, tunnels or ferries may
result in very long routes.
7
190 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
GPS Information
Guidance Prompts
The GPS Information menu displays Current Location,
Coordinates in degrees, minutes and seconds (touch the
DECIMAL soft-key to switch to Decimal degrees), number of used satellites, a map of the calculated position,
and elevation.
Select and adjust the navigation guidance prompts in this
menu.
Press the NAV hard-key to exit to the NAV - Main Menu.
Touch the SAMPLE VOL soft-key to listen to the current
volume setting.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 191
Once satisfied with the volume, touch the SAVE soft-key
to save the settings. Touch the CANCEL soft-key to exit
the menu without saving the settings.
Map Viewer
Press the NAV hard-key to switch to the Navigation Main Menu.
Press the NAV hard-key again to toggle between Navigation - Main Menu and navigation MAP.
The tip of the arrow in the circle in the center shows your
vehicle’s position on the map. The square soft-keys on
the left show the map zoom factor, the map orientation,
the display mode, and the current location soft-key.
7
192 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
Map Zoom Level
Map Orientation
Press the Zoom soft-key to change the zoom level.
Touch the soft-key with the compass arrow to toggle
between a map oriented to the North, or oriented parallel
to the vehicle heading.
NOTE:
Map orientation to the North is not available in 3D mode.
3D Map Viewer
Touch the soft-key with the 2D/3D symbol to toggle
between 2D or 3D map views.
Touch the slider or the IN and OUT soft-keys to change
the zoom level. Roads with lower functional classification
are not shown in higher zoom levels. (E.g. residential
streets, lightly-traveled county roads.)
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 193
Minimize Buttons
Stop Over
Touch the Minimize Button on the lower right of the map
to hide/show all the other buttons on the map.
Route Lines
The navigation radio displays recorded trail lines as
yellow lines on top of the road map. (See Record New
Trail section for more details.)
Suggested routes are displayed as bright green lines on
top of the road map when the route guidance is active.
NOTE:
Suggested routes (green) have a higher priority than
When the route guidance is active, press the Add Stop
recorded trails and may overwrite recorded trail lines.
Over soft-key to add multiple destinations. After you
confirm a stop over, you may either go to the entered stop
over first, or add it to a destination list.
Touch the ADD soft-key to confirm the stop over destination.
7
194 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
NOTE:
Once you reach a destination, the system will automatically guide you to the next destination on the list.
To review the destination list, touch the OPTIONS softkey in the Route Guidance screen and touch the VIEW
DESTINATIONS soft-key.
To show the destinations information touch the Desired
Destinations soft-key.
Touch the EXIT soft-key to exit the Destination Info
menu.
Trip Planner
If you are traveling to multiple destinations, the My Trip
function will allow you to calculate and save the route to
each destination.
1. Touch the My Trips soft-key in the NAV - Main Menu.
2. Touch the PLAN NEW TRIP soft-key to start a new
trip.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 195
3. Name the trip and touch the SAVE soft-key.
4. Touch ADD DESTINATION.
5. Enter a destination (see section Destination Input in
this manual).
7
196 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
In the Confirm Destination screen:
NOTE:
6. Touch the SAVE soft-key to add the destination to the You can add up to eight destinations to a trip. The display
list.
shows the Itinerary is FULL message in the status line if
all eight destinations are used.
7. Touch the EXIT soft-key to access the My Trips menu.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 197
8. You may now either PLAN NEW TRIP, DELETE ALL 9. Touch a destination soft-key to get the destination
your trips, or select your trip by touching the soft-key
information, or touch the START THIS TRIP soft-key
with the desired trip name.
to start the trip.
NOTE:
10. Touch the GO soft-key to confirm the first destination
You may add up to 12 trips to the list. The display shows
of the trip.
the My Trips is FULL message in the status line if all 12
You may touch the EDIT TRIP soft-key to edit the trip.
trips are used.
7
198 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
In the Edit Trip menu you may rename, delete, or edit the You may now Change Name or Change Address.
details of this trip. Touch a destination in the list.
Touch the EXIT soft-key to confirm your changes.
From the Edit Trip menu touch the desired destination
Touch the Modify Input Order soft-key in the Edit
you would like to edit.
Address Info menu to rearrange the order of the destinations in the trip.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 199
SiriusXM Traffic by SiriusXM Satellite Radio
The SiriusXM Traffic service is a specific application that
works with your vehicles navigation system. Pinpoint
traffic incidents, accidents and road closings. You can
even determine average traffic speed and estimate travel
time along your route. You must have a subscription to
SiriusXM Traffic for this service to work. Refer to the
re-subscribe to SiriusXM Satellite Radio section of this
manual, if your service has expired.
SiriusXM Traffic Market Coverage
Touch the yellow up and down arrow soft-keys to move Traffic speed information is available in over 130 markets
the entry in the list. Touch the SAVE soft-key when you and is shown with colored red, yellow or green lines
are done.
alongside each major highway. The largest markets also
offer coverage on minor roads.
7
200 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
SiriusXM Traffic features all of this at the push of a
button:
1. Coverage of nearly 1 million miles of roadways nationwide.
2. Alerts on major accidents, construction and road closings.
3. 24/7 coast-to-coast traffic information delivered by
our satellites.
4. Rigorous quality testing that ensures SiriusXM has
best-in-class traffic data.
• A transparent green line indicates flowing traffic with
speeds greater than or equal to 65% of the speed as
given by the digital map.
• A transparent yellow line indicates an average driving
speed 20% and 65% of the speed as given by the digital
map.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 201
• A transparent red line indicates an average driving 2. Touch the SiriusXM Traffic soft-key to display the
speed is less than or equal to 20% of the speed as given
available traffic messages.
by the digital map.
Display Traffic Messages
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the right side of the radio.
7
The traffic message screen displays traffic messages in a
list form. Data related to traffic flows, incidents and
construction are gathered from traffic monitoring systems, emergency services, motorists’ calls, etc., and are
202 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
processed at a central traffic information center. The Touch Map to see the location of a message on a map.
information is transferred to the Traffic Information ser- Touch PREVIOUS or NEXT to step through the list of
vice provider, who then generates the Traffic messages available messages.
that are sent by SiriusXM to the vehicle.
Touch the back soft-key in the upper left corner of the
3. Touch one of the soft-keys with a message to view screen to exit the Traffic Message Detail screen.
details.
Switching SiriusXM Traffic On or Off
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the right side of the
radio.
2. Touch the SiriusXM Traffic soft-key.
3. Touch Setup to access the SiriusXM Traffic Setup
menu.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 203
Speed and Flow
Touch the Speed and Flow soft-key to enable/disable
Speed and Flow traffic information. Once you change
settings, touch the SAVE soft-key to confirm your
changes.
View All Messages
You can view either all received messages for the area
you have a subscription, or only the messages on your
route within the same area.
Dynamic Route Guidance
The Traffic icon in the upper right corner of the
screen indicates that the Traffic receiver is on. The
green icon indicates an active subscription, the
yellow icon indicates an expired subscription. Refer to
the Re-Subscribe to SiriusXM Satellite Radio chapter in
the Radio section of this manual.
Ongoing route guidance will change your route based
upon the traffic information received. The AUTO mode
will make these changes automatically; the MANUAL
mode will ask for each traffic event.
7
204 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
Touch the LEGEND soft-key in the SiriusXM Traffic
The navigation radio can display icons on the map when Setup menu to review possible icons and their meaning.
the SiriusXM Traffic function is active.
Address Book
SiriusXM Traffic Legend
NOTE:
Overview
It can take between 15 and 30 minutes for a message to
The address book provides a way to organize and store
reach the system.
frequently used addresses.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 205
• The Default Folder contains contacts which are available whenever the vehicle is not in motion. Touch the
• The HOME folder contains only your home address.
Default Folder soft-key to add, edit, delete, and route
Touch this folder soft-key to edit your home address.
to your contacts.
You may route to this address by touching the Guide
Me Home soft-key in the NAV - Main Menu.
• The Voice Command Created Entries folder contains
contacts which were created with the help of the Voice
• The In-Motion Folder contains links to entries in the
Command System. Touch the Voice Command Created
other folders. The In-Motion Folder is the only folder
Entries folder soft-key to add, edit, delete, and route to
accessible while the vehicle is in motion. This is a
your contacts.
safety feature that limits the availability of certain
navigation tasks while the vehicle is traveling. Touch Add a Folder
the In-Motion Folder soft-key and add links to existing Touch the +Folder soft-key to add a personalized folder.
entries in the Default Folder, Voice Command Created After the new folder is named, the folder will be available
Entries folder, or any of the personalized folders.
in the address book.
The address book is organized in folders.
7
206 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
Entering/Editing/Deleting an Address
1. Touch Menu to access one of the menus.
3. Touch My Address Book soft-key to get to the Address
Book menu.
2. Touch My Files for the Manage My Files screen.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 207
The Address Book screen appears.
To select an address from another folder, touch one of the
folder soft-keys.
4. To select an address from the Default folder, touch the
Default Folder soft-key.
5. Touch the ADD soft-key to add a new contact. Touch
CLEAR ALL to delete all contacts in this folder, touch
EXIT to go back to the Address Book menu, or touch a
soft-key with a contact name to view, edit, or change
the Contact Information.
7
208 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
You may now create a new contact or copy a contact from
another folder.
6. Touch Create New Contact to go to the next screen.
7. Enter a name for your new contact.
8. Press the SAVE soft-key to display the Contact Information menu.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 209
You may now edit the contact information. Add a voice In this example, we need to add an address to the contact.
tag for the voice recognition or touch the Edit Contact
9. Press Add Address and enter a destination (refer to
soft-key to add more information to the entry.
Destination Input section in this manual).
Touch the DELETE soft-key to delete the contact.
7
210 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
10. Once the destination is entered, touch the SAVE
In addition, you may enter a phone number by pressing
soft-key to confirm the address.
the Add Phone # soft-key.
11. Touch the EXIT soft-key after all available information has been entered.
Uconnect® GPS Navigation 211
Search a Contact in the Address Book
1. Touch the SEARCH soft-key in the Address Book menu.
4. Touch the B. Jeffries soft-key from the results list to
select the contact.
2. Enter a contact name.
3. Touch either LIST or CONTINUE.
7
212 Uconnect® GPS Navigation
5. Once the contact information is displayed, touch the
Route To soft-key to start route guidance to the
contacts address, or touch Call Contact if a valid
phone was entered and a telephone is connected to the
navigation radio.
SYSTEM INFORMATION
CONTENTS
䡵 User Data Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ iPod/Digital Device Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
䡵 Database Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ Navigation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
䡵 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 䡵 Glossary Of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
8
214 SYSTEM INFORMATION
Press the MENU hard-key on the right side of the radio User Data Backup
and touch the System Setup soft-key to access the System Contact your local authorized dealer for information on
Setup menu.
how to backup or transfer your user data, such as address
Touch the System Information soft-key to access the book entries, music files, etc., before returning or changing to a vehicle with a compatible navigation radio (e.g.,
system information.
end of lease).
Database Updates
Contact your local authorized dealer for information on
available database updates.
Updates are available for the navigation radio software
and the navigation database.
Please read the specific instructions on the update discs
before installing the updates.
Contact your local authorized dealer if you need help or
more information about the available updates.
SYSTEM INFORMATION 215
Map Updates
Disc
Navigation map database updates are periodically made
available, when feasible and appropriate, to customers. A
map database update is either made available from
www.navigation.com, from your vehicle dealership, or
from both. It is generally provided on a DVD, which can
then be uploaded to the radio head unit.
Q: The radio does not display the information for the disc
I inserted. How do I access this information?
Troubleshooting
A: The radio will search the internal Gracenote® music
recognition technology database on the hard drive for the
inserted disc. If the database is out of date or the database
does not contain the particular disc, the information
cannot be displayed. Contact an authorized dealer or
website www.DriveUconnect.com for available updates.
Radio
HDD
Q: I cannot find my favorite radio station that I was
Q: When the radio is playing songs from the HDD, it
always able to receive before. What can I do?
jumps to the first song in the list. Why does it do that?
A: Select MUSIC TYPE while in radio mode. Select
A: After the radio is done copying or ripping music to the
CLEAR to disable all PTY filters, and try to SEEK for your
HDD, it needs to rebuild the current playlist. After the
station.
playlist was rebuilt, the radio starts to play the first song
in the current playlist.
8
216 SYSTEM INFORMATION
NOTE:
Q: I cannot copy the iTunes library songs from my iPod to MP4 and M4V files are not supported.
the HDD.
Q: My iPod does not play audio on the radio.
iPod/Digital Device Control
A: That is correct. iPod does not allow iTunes library A: Make sure the iPod is connected via the iPod connector.
songs to be copied off the iPod.
Navigation
Q: Can I use an iPod to copy songs to the HDD?
Q: I entered the wrong home address. How can I change it?
A: Yes. Copy to WMA or MP3 files to the USB storage
A: Go to My Files, then Address Book. In the Address
partition on your iPod. Connect the iPod to the USB
Book, press the HOME soft-key. Press Edit Contact to edit
connector on the radio and copy the files to the HDD.
the entry. Refer to the Getting Started section for more
details.
SYSTEM INFORMATION 217
Voice Command
Q: The voice command does not understand what I say.
What can I do to make this work?
A: If the navigation radio has trouble recognizing your
voice, you should press the MENU hard-key, press
System Setup, and then press the Voice Command softkey to access the Voice Command menu. Touch the Start
Voice Training soft-key and follow the spoken instructions.
Uconnect® Phone
Q: My phone does not pair to the radio. How do I know
if my phone is compatible?
A: Refer to the compatibility device list located on the
following brand websites: www.DriveUconnect.com.
Glossary Of Terms
AS
CD
CDC
CDDB
DVD
DVDC
FIX
GMD
GPS
Autostore
Compact Disc
Compact Disc Changer
A technology company founded in
1995 as CDDB, Inc. The company has
been renamed to Gracenote, Inc. The
technology has been renamed to the
Gracenote media recognition service.
Digital Versatile Disc
Digital Versatile Disc Changer
A position determined from terrestrial, electronic, or astronomical data.
Gracenote Media Database,
Gracenote Media Recognition
Service (www.gracenote.com)
Global Positioning System
8
218 SYSTEM INFORMATION
GMT
HDD
HFM
MFB
MFS
MP3 MPEG-1
Audio Layer-3.
M4A
M4P
Greenwich Mean Time
Hard-Disk Drive
Hands-Free Module
Multifunction soft-key
Multi Functional Steering Wheel
Compression scheme used to transfer audio files via the Internet and
store in portable players and digital
audio servers.
The .M4A format is actually the
audio layer of (non-video) MPEG 4
movies.
The .M4P format is an audio file purchased from Apple’s Music Store
(iTunes) and is protected by a Digital
Rights Management scheme.
NAV
POS
PTY
RBDS
SAT
SDS
TMC
VES™
WMA
Navigation
Position
Program type (radio)
Radio Broadcast Data System
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Speech Dialog System
Traffic Message Channel
Video Entertainment System
Windows Media Audio Format
Uconnect 730N
®
14UC730-526-AA
First Edition
Uconnect® 730N
Chrysler Group LLC
Printed in the USA
Owner’s Manual Supplement
Download a FREE electronic copy of the
Owner’s Manual or Warranty Booklet
by visiting the Owners tab at:
www.dodge.com (U.S.)
www.dodge.ca (Canada)
> 2014 AVENGER // User Guide
14D41-926-AA
AVENGER
Second Edition
User Guide
1425229_14b_Avenger_UG_072513.indd 1
7/25/13 10:50 AM
dodge.com
This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly acquainted with your new Dodge and to
provide a convenient reference source for common questions. However, it is not a substitute for
your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions, maintenance procedures and important safety messages,
please consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect® Manuals and other Warning Labels in
your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on
accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada)
or your local Dodge dealer.
> IMPORTANT
This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle.
The DVD enclosed contains your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect® Manuals, Warranty
Booklets, Tire Warranty and Roadside Assistance (new vehicles purchased in the U.S.) or
Roadside Assistance (new vehicles purchased in Canada) in electronic format. We hope you
find it useful. Replacement DVD kits may be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Copyright 2013 Chrysler Group LLC.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you
may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Owner’s
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect® Manuals or Warranty Booklet
by calling 1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
or by contacting your dealer.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in a collision and personal injury. Chrysler Group
LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or
feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices such as cell
phones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the
vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is
also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself
unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and
stop your vehicle. Some States or Provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting
while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
1425229_14b_Avenger_UG_072513.indd 2
Driving and alcohol
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be
seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t
drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
7/25/13 10:50 AM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION/WELCOME
POWER OUTLET
WELCOME FROM CHRYSLER GROUP LLC . . . 2
UTILITY
CONTROLS AT A GLANCE
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER
WEIGHT RATINGS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME,
ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
DRIVER COCKPIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
GETTING STARTED
KEY FOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
REMOTE START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
SEAT BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) —
AIR BAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
CHILD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
FRONT SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
REAR SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
HEATED SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . . 19
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
TURN SIGNAL/LIGHTS LEVER . . . . . .
WIPER/WASHER LEVER . . . . . . . . .
SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . .
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
(ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWER SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . . .
WIND BUFFETING . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
20
22
23
24
. . . 25
. . . 26
. . . 27
ELECTRONICS
YOUR VEHICLE'S SOUND SYSTEM . . . . . . 28
Uconnect® 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Uconnect® 130 WITH SiriusXM SATELLITE
RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Uconnect® 430/430N . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Uconnect® 730N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
SiriusXM SATELLITE RADIO/TRAVEL LINK . . 55
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . 59
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . 59
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Uconnect® VOICE COMMAND . . . . . . . . . 63
Bluetooth® STREAMING AUDIO . . . . . . . . 66
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . 67
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WARNING LIGHTS . . 74
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . 78
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . 79
BATTERY LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . 88
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . 89
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . 90
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . 91
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
OPENING THE HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . 93
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . 95
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . 96
MAINTENANCE RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . 100
FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
TIRE PRESSURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE . . . . . . 104
EXTERIOR BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CHRYSLER GROUP LLC CUSTOMER
CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
CHRYSLER CANADA INC. CUSTOMER
CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING
IMPAIRED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
PUBLICATIONS ORDERING . . . . . . . . . . 105
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS IN THE UNITED
STATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
MOPAR® ACCESSORIES
AUTHENTIC ACCESSORIES BY MOPAR®
. . 107
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
FAQ (How To?)
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
. . . . . . 111
INTRODUCTION/WELCOME
WELCOME FROM CHRYSLER GROUP LLC
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle. Be assured that it
represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that
are traditional to our vehicles.
Your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle has characteristics to enhance the driver's control
under some driving conditions. These are to assist the driver and are never a substitute for
attentive driving. They can never take the driver's place. Always drive carefully.
Your new vehicle has many features for the comfort and convenience of you and your
passengers. Some of these should not be used when driving because they take your eyes
from the road or your attention from driving. Never text while driving or take your eyes more
than momentarily off the road.
This guide illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either
standard or optional on this vehicle. This guide may also include a description of features
and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this guide that are not available on this
vehicle. Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
This User Guide has been prepared to help you quickly become acquainted with the
important features of your vehicle. It contains most things you will need to operate and
maintain the vehicle, including emergency information.
The DVD includes a computer application containing detailed owner's information which
can be viewed on a personal computer or MAC computer. The multimedia DVD also includes
videos which can be played on any standard DVD player (including the Uconnect® Touchscreen Radios). Additional DVD operational information is located on the back of the DVD
sleeve.
For complete owner information, refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD in the owner’s
kit provided at the time of new vehicle purchase. For your convenience, the information
contained on the DVD may also be printed and saved for future reference.
Chrysler Group LLC is committed to protecting our environment and natural resources. By
converting from paper to electronic delivery for the majority of the user information for your
vehicle, together we greatly reduce the demand for tree-based products and lessen the
stress on our environment.
2
INTRODUCTION/WELCOME
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed
to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution.
WARNING!
•
•
•
•
•
•
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the
risk of serious personal injury.
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal
causing a loss of vehicle control.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference
with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons.
A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
Never use the ‘PARK’ position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.
USE OF AFTERMARKET PRODUCTS (ELECTRONICS)
The use of aftermarket devices including cell phones, MP3 players, GPS systems, or
chargers may affect the performance of on-board wireless features including Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ and Remote Start range. If you are experiencing difficulties with any of your
wireless features, try disconnecting your aftermarket devices to see if the situation improves. If your symptoms persist, please see an authorized dealer.
CHRYSLER, DODGE, JEEP, RAM TRUCK, SRT, ATF+4, MOPAR and Uconnect are registered
trademarks of Chrysler Group LLC.
COPYRIGHT ©2013 CHRYSLER GROUP LLC
3
CONTROLS AT A GLANCE
DRIVER COCKPIT
1. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Controls pg. 66
2. Turn Signal/Lights Lever (behind steering wheel) pg. 20
3. Instrument Cluster pg. 6
4. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
5. Speed Control pg. 23
6. Wiper/Washer Lever pg. 22
7. Ignition Switch (behind steering wheel)
8. Audio System pg. 28
9. Switch Panel
• Heated Seat Switches pg. 18
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF pg. 74
• Hazard Switch
10. Automatic Climate Controls pg. 25
4
CONTROLS AT A GLANCE
11. Glove Compartment
12. Power Outlet pg. 71
13. iPod®/USB/MP3 Control pg. 59
14. Shifter
15. Emergency Brake
16. Hood Release pg. 92
17. Power Windows
18. Auto Down
19. Power Door Locks
20. Power Mirrors
5
CONTROLS AT A GLANCE
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Warning Lights
BRAKE
- Low Fuel Warning Light
- Charging System Light**
- Oil Pressure Warning Light**
- Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light**
- Air Bag Warning Light**
- Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Light
- Engine Temperature Warning Light
- Transmission Temperature Warning Light
- Seat Belt Reminder Light
- Brake Warning Light**
- Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)**
- Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light**
(See page 74 for more information.)
6
CONTROLS AT A GLANCE
Indicators
- Turn Signal Indicators
- High Beam Indicator
- Front Fog Light Indicator
- Park/Headlight ON Indicator
- Vehicle Security Indicator*
CRUISE - Cruise Indicator
- Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) Off Indicator
Odometer Messages
door - Door Ajar
deck - Trunk Ajar
HOTOIL* - Engine Oil is over temperature
CHANgE OIL* - Change Engine Oil
gASCAP - Fuel Cap Fault
LoW tirE* - Low Tire Pressure
* If equipped
** Bulb Check with Key On
7
GETTING STARTED
KEY FOB
Locking And Unlocking The Doors
• Press and release the LOCK button on the
RKE transmitter to lock both doors. The
turn signal lights will flash and the horn
will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
• Press and release the UNLOCK button on
the RKE transmitter once to unlock the
driver’s door (EVIC can be setup for driver
door first, otherwise this will unlock all
doors), or press the unlock button twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
• All doors can be programmed to unlock
on the first press of the UNLOCK button.
Refer to Programmable Features in this
guide.
1 — Trunk
2 — Unlock
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
Opening The Trunk
• Press the TRUNK button on the transmitter two times within five seconds to open the
trunk.
Panic Alarm
• Press the PANIC button once to turn the panic alarm on.
• Wait approximately three seconds and press the button a second time to turn the panic
alarm off.
WARNING!
•
•
•
8
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons.
A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
Do not leave the key fob in the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
GETTING STARTED
REMOTE START
• Press the REMOTE START button 2 on the Key Fob twice within five seconds. Pressing
the REMOTE START button a third time shuts the engine off.
x
• To drive the vehicle, press the UNLOCK button, insert the key in the ignition and turn to the
ON/RUN position.
• With remote start, the engine will only run for 15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition key
is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• The vehicle must be started with the key after two consecutive timeouts.
WARNING!
•
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause you or others to be severely injured or killed when inhaled.
Keep Key Fob transmitters away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause you and others to be
severely injured or killed.
SECURITY ALARM
To Arm:
• Lock the door using either the power door lock switch (one door must be open) or the
LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (doors can be open or
closed), and close all doors.
NOTE:
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors with the manual door lock
plungers.
• The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash for 16 seconds. This shows
that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During this period, if a door is opened, the
ignition is cycled to ON/RUN, or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm.
NOTE:
• During the 16-second arming period, if a door is opened or the ignition is cycled to
ON/RUN, the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm.
• Once armed, the Vehicle Security Alarm disables the unlock switch on the driver door
trim panel and passenger door trim panel.
9
GETTING STARTED
To Disarm The System:
• Press the Key Fob UNLOCK button or cycle the ignition to the ON/START position.
• The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create
conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and
open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle
Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
SEAT BELT
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
• Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap
portion, pull up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt
in a collision.
• Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your
neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You
are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop you could move too
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must
be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
webbing, etc.).
• The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices
that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
• A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
NOTE:
When the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver's seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on
continuously.
10
GETTING STARTED
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not
buckled up properly. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you
can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) — AIR BAGS
• This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and right front passenger as
a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not
deploy in every type of collision.
• Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing
the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the
risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.
• This vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains to
protect the driver, front and rear passengers sitting next to a window.
• This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags to provide
enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact.
is not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
• If the Air Bag Warning Light
driving, have the vehicle serviced by an authorized service center immediately.
• Refer to the Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details regarding the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS).
WARNING!
•
•
•
•
•
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air
Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains and Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side
Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in
the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain and/or SeatMounted Side Air Bag during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in
another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
11
GETTING STARTED
CHILD RESTRAINTS
• Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
• Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children
ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK
(1–866–732–8243).
• Canadian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
LATCH — Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
• Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which
stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren.
• The rear outboard seating positions have lower anchors and top tether anchors. The rear
center seating position has a top tether anchor only.
• You may use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
•
12
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are
just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel
them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
GETTING STARTED
•
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position
located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window. These tether strap
anchorages are under a plastic cover with the tether anchorage symbol on it.
• Do not install child restraints with rigid
lower attachments in the center seating
position. Only install this type of child restraint in the outboard seating positions.
Child restraints with flexible, webbing
mounted lower attachments can be installed in any rear seating position. In the
center position, the inner anchorages are
15.4 inches (392 mm) apart.
Installing The Child Restraint Using The LATCH Lower Anchors
NOTE:
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
3. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See below
for directions to attach a tether anchor.
4. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat
at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Installing The Child Restraint Using The Vehicle Seat Belts
• The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
• Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child
restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
13
GETTING STARTED
To Install A Child Seat Using An ALR:
1. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of
the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
2. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
3. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.
4. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all
the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
5. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out
any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat the last step.
6. Finally, pull up on any extra webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint
while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
7. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
below for directions to attach a tether anchor.
8. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat
at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Installing The Top Tether Strap (With Either Lower Anchors Or Vehicle Seat Belt):
• When installing a forward-facing child restraint, always secure the top tether strap, up to
the tether anchor weight limit, whether the child restraint is installed with the lower
anchors or the vehicle seat belt.
1. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly behind the seat where you are
placing the child restraint.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat.
3. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint,
and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two
posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the
outboard side of the head restraint.
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage and
remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
14
GETTING STARTED
WARNING!
•
•
•
•
•
•
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, can become a projectile inside
the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and
others could be severely injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in
a proper restraint for the child's size.
Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a
front passenger air bag. An air bag deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure
of an infant or child restraint. The child could be severely injured or killed. Follow the
manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.
FRONT SEATS
Power Seat
• The power seat switch, located on the
outboard side of the seat near the floor,
controls forward/back, up/down, and tilt
adjustment.
• The recline switch controls the seatback
recliner.
15
GETTING STARTED
Manual Seat Adjustment
Forward/Rearward
• Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the
front of the seat near the floor and release
it when the seat is at the desired position.
Then, using body pressure, move forward
and backward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
Recliner
• Lift the recliner lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back and release at the desired position.
Lumbar Support
• The lumbar adjust lever is on the outboard
side of the seatback. Rotate the lumbar
adjust lever downward to increase the
lumbar support or upward to decrease the
lumbar support as desired.
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment
• The height adjustment control lever is located on the outboard side of the seat.
Raise the lever to raise the seat. Lower the
lever to lower the seat.
16
GETTING STARTED
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by
an obstruction in the seat’s path.
WARNING!
•
•
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of
the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted,
and you could be severely injured or killed. Only adjust a seat while the vehicle is
parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt and be severely
injured or killed. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
REAR SEATS
Folding Rear Seatback
• To fold the rear seatback forward, pull on
the loops to fold down either or both seatbacks. When returning the rear seatback
to the upright position, be sure the seatback is latched.
17
GETTING STARTED
HEATED SEATS
Front Heated Seats
• The controls for the front heated seats are
located in the center console below the
climate controls.
• Press the switch once to select High-level
heating. Press the switch a second time
to select Low-level heating. Press the
switch a third time to shut the heating
elements Off.
• If the High-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to Lowlevel after approximately 60 minutes. The
Low-level setting will turn Off automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
WARNING!
•
•
18
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been
overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
GETTING STARTED
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
• The tilt/telescoping control lever is located below the steering wheel at the end
of the steering column.
• Push down on the lever to unlock the
steering column.
• To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as
desired.
• To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
push it inward as desired.
• Pull upward on the lever to lock the column firmly in place.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The tilt/telescoping adjustment must be
locked while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or driving without the
tilt/telescoping adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in you and others being severely injured or killed.
19
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
• A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and
axle) in your vehicle.
• Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
• While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws
contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
• The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving
type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality
grades, refer to “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of
operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as
an indication to an engine problem or malfunction.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result.
TURN SIGNAL/LIGHTS LEVER
Headlights/Parking Lights/Automatic Headlights
• Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent for parking lights
, and the third detent for AUTO.
for headlights
, the second detent
• When set to AUTO, the system automatically turns the headlights on or off based on
ambient light levels.
20
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
Instrument Panel Dimmer
• Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the
instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is
opened.
• Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument
panel lights when the parking lights or headlights are on.
• Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the
odometer and radio controls when the parking lights or headlights are on.
• Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior
lighting.
Flash To Pass
• Pull the lever toward you to activate the high beams. The high beams will remain on until
the lever is released.
High Beam Operation
• Push the lever forward to activate the high beams.
NOTE:
For safe driving, turn off the high beams when oncoming traffic is present to prevent
headlight glare and as a courtesy to other motorists.
Front Fog Lights
• Turn on the parking lights or low beam headlights and pull out the end of the lever.
Turn Signals/Lane Change Assist
• Tap the lever up or down once and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times and
automatically turn off.
21
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
WIPER/WASHER LEVER
Front Wipers
Intermittent, Low And High Operation
• Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent position for one of five intermittent settings,
the second detent for low wiper operation and the third detent for high wiper operation.
Mist
• Pull down on the lever and release when a single wipe is desired.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be
sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be activated in order to spray the
windshield with washer fluid.
Washer Operation
• Pull the lever toward you and hold for as long as spray is desired.
22
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
SPEED CONTROL
• The Speed Control switches are located on the steering wheel.
Cruise ON/OFF
• Push the ON/OFF button to activate the
Speed Control.
• CRUISE
will appear on the instrument
cluster to indicate the Speed Control is
on.
• Push the ON/OFF button a second time to
turn the system off.
SET
• With the Speed Control on, push and release the SET – button to set a desired
speed.
Accel/Decel
• Once a speed is set, pushing the RES + button once or the SET – button once will increase
or decrease the set speed approximately 1 mph (2 km/h).
• Push and hold the RES + button to accelerate in 5 mph (8 km/h) increments or push and
hold the SET – button to decelerate in 5 mph (8 km/h) increments; release the button to
save the new set speed.
Resume
• To resume a previously selected set speed in memory, push the RES + button and
release.
Cancel
• Push the CANCEL button, or apply the brakes to cancel the set speed and maintain the
set speed memory.
• Push the ON/OFF button to turn the system off and erase the set speed memory.
WARNING!
•
•
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could
lose control and have a collision. Always leave the Electronic Speed Control system
off when you are not using it.
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a
constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. A collision could be the result. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy
traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
23
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROLS
Air Recirculation
• Use Recirculation for maximum A/C operation.
• For window defogging, turn the recirculation button off.
• Recirculation is allowed in floor and defrost/floor (mix modes) for approximately five
minutes.
Heated Mirrors
• The mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn on
the rear window defroster.
24
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS (ATC)
Automatic Operation
• Turn the Mode and Blower Controls to the AUTO position.
• Select the desired temperature by rotating the Temperature Control.
• The system will maintain the set temperature automatically.
Air Conditioning (A/C)
• If the air conditioning button is pressed while in AUTO mode, the system will exit AUTO
mode and stay in A/C. The mode and blower will go to the previous user setting.
Air Recirculation
• Use Recirculation for maximum A/C operation.
• For window defogging, turn the recirculation button off.
• If the recirculation button is pressed while in the AUTO mode, the indicator light may
flash three times to indicate the cabin air is being controlled automatically.
Heated Mirrors
• The mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn on
the rear window defroster.
25
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF
• The power sunroof switch is located on
the overhead console.
Opening Sunroof
Express Open
• Press the switch rearward and release it
within one-half second. The sunroof will
fully open and stop automatically.
Manual Open
• Press and hold the switch rearward to
open the sunroof. Any release of the
switch will stop the movement, and the
sunroof will remain in a partially open position until the switch is pressed again.
Venting Sunroof
• Press and release the button and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent” and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the sunroof.
1 – Opening Sunroof
2 – Venting Sunroof
3 – Closing Sunroof
Closing Sunroof
Express Closing
• Press the switch forward and release it within one-half second. The sunroof will fully
close automatically from any position.
Manual Closing
• Press and hold the switch forward to close the sunroof. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement, and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed position until the switch
is pressed again.
26
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protection Feature
• This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch
forward and release to Express Close.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth
close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
WARNING!
•
•
•
Do not let children play with the sunroof. Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open
sunroof. You could also be severely injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt
properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
WIND BUFFETING
• Wind buffeting can be described as a helicopter-type percussion sound. If buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, adjust the front and rear windows together.
• If buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening, or adjust any
window. This will minimize buffeting.
27
ELECTRONICS
YOUR VEHICLE'S SOUND SYSTEM
1. Uconnect® Voice Command Button pg. 63
2. Uconnect® Phone Button pg. 60
3. Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Left) pg. 59
4. Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Right) pg. 59
28
ELECTRONICS
5. USB port pg. 39
6. Audio Jack pg. 39
7. Power Outlet pg. 71
8. USB Port pg. 48
29
ELECTRONICS
Uconnect® 130
NOTE:
Your radio has many features that add to the comfort and convenience of you and your
passengers. Some of these radio features should not be used when driving because they
take your eyes from the road or your attention from driving.
Clock Setting
• Press and hold the “TIME” button until the hours blink; turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” control
knob to set the hours.
• Press the “TUNE/SCROLL” control knob until the minutes begin to blink; turn the “TUNE/
SCROLL” control knob to set the minutes.
• Press the “TUNE/SCROLL” control knob to save the time change.
• To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
Equalizer, Balance And Fade
• Press the “TUNE/SCROLL” control knob and “BASS” will display. Rotate the “TUNE/
SCROLL” control knob to select the desired setting. Subsequent presses of the "TUNE/
SCROLL" control knob will display, "MID RANGE," "TREBLE," "BALANCE" and "FADE.”
30
ELECTRONICS
Radio Operation
Seek Up/Down Buttons
• Press to seek through radio stations in AM or FM bands.
• Hold either button to bypass stations without stopping.
Store Radio Presets
• Press the “SET/RND” or “SET” (depending on the radio) button once and SET 1 will show
in the display. Then select button (1–6).
• A second station may be added to each push button. Press the “SET/RND” or “SET”
(depending on the radio) button twice and SET 2 will show in the display. Then select
button (1–6).
CD/DISC Operation
Seek Up/Down Buttons
• Press to seek through CD tracks.
• Hold either button to bypass tracks without stopping.
SET/RND or RND (depending on radio) Button (Random Play)
• Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play.
• This feature plays the selections on the CD in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Audio Jack Operation
• The AUX/Audio Jack provides a means to connect a portable audio device, such as an
MP3 player or an iPod®, to the vehicle’s sound system. This requires the use of a 3.5 mm
stereo audio patch cable.
• Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the Audio Jack is
connected, allowing the music from your portable device to play through the vehicle's
speakers.
• The functions of the portable device are controlled using the device buttons, not the
buttons on the radio. However, the volume may be controlled using the radio or portable
device.
31
ELECTRONICS
Uconnect® 130 WITH SiriusXM SATELLITE RADIO
NOTE:
• Your radio may not be equipped with the Uconnect® Voice Command and Uconnect®
Phone features. To determine if your radio has these features, press the Voice Command
button on the radio. You will hear a voice prompt if you have the feature, or see a message
on the radio stating “Uconnect Phone not available” if you do not.
• Your radio has many features that add to the comfort and convenience of you and your
passengers. Some of these radio features should not be used when driving because they
take your eyes from the road or your attention from driving.
Clock Setting
• Press and hold the “TIME” button until the hours blink; turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” control
knob to set the hours.
• Press the “TUNE/SCROLL” control knob until the minutes begin to blink; turn the “TUNE/
SCROLL” control knob to set the minutes.
• Press the “TUNE/SCROLL” control knob to save the time change.
• To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
32
ELECTRONICS
Equalizer, Balance And Fade
• Press the “TUNE/SCROLL” control knob and “BASS” will display. Rotate the “TUNE/
SCROLL” control knob to select the desired setting. Subsequent presses of the "TUNE/
SCROLL" control knob will display, "MID RANGE," "TREBLE," "BALANCE" and "FADE.”
Radio Operation
Seek Up/Down Buttons
• Press to seek through radio stations in AM, FM, or SAT bands.
• Hold either button to bypass stations without stopping.
Store Radio Presets
• Press the “SET/RND” or “SET” (depending on the radio) button once and SET 1 will show
in the display. Then select button (1–6).
• A second station may be added to each push button. Press the “SET/RND” or “SET”
(depending on the radio) button twice and SET 2 will show in the display. Then select
button (1–6).
Music Type
NOTE:
The Music Type function only operates when in FM mode.
• Press the “MUSIC TYPE” button to activate this mode. Press the “MUSIC TYPE” button
again or turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” control knob to select the desired music type (Adult
Hits, Country, Jazz, Oldies, Rock, etc.).
• When a music type is chosen and the Music type is displayed, press either “SEEK” button
and the radio will only search for stations with the selected music type.
SETUP Button
• Pressing the “SETUP” button allows you to select between items that are available in that
particular mode.
• Turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” control knob to scroll through the entries. Push the “AUDIO/
SELECT” button to select an entry and make changes.
33
ELECTRONICS
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
• SiriusXM services require subscriptions, sold separately after the 12-month trial included with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the end
of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM
Customer Agreement for complete terms at http://www.siriusxm.com. All fees and
programming subject to change. Our satellite service is available only to those at least 18
and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our Sirius satellite service is also available
in PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet radio service is available throughout our
satellite service area and in AK and HI. © 2013 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
• SiriusXM Satellite Radio gives you over 130 channels, including 100% commercial-free
music from nearly every genre, plus all your favorite sports, news, talk and entertainment
channels–all with crystal clear, coast-to-coast coverage, all in one place and all at your
fingertips.
• To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, press the “SAT” hard-key.
CD/DISC Operation
Seek Up/Down Buttons
• Press to seek through CD tracks.
• Hold either button to bypass tracks without stopping.
SET/RND or RND (depending on radio) Button (Random Play)
• Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play.
• This feature plays the selections on the CD in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
LIST Button
• Press the “LIST” button to bring up a list of all folders on the CD. Scroll up or down the list
by turning the “TUNE/SCROLL” control knob.
• To select a folder from the list, press the “TUNE/SCROLL” control knob and the radio will
begin playing the files contained in that folder.
Audio Jack Operation
• The AUX/Audio Jack provides a means to connect a portable audio device, such as an
MP3 player or an iPod®, to the vehicle’s sound system. This requires the use of a 3.5 mm
stereo audio patch cable.
• Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the Audio Jack is
connected, allowing the music from your portable device to play through the vehicle's
speakers.
• The functions of the portable device are controlled using the device buttons, not the
buttons on the radio. However, the volume may be controlled using the radio or portable
device.
34
ELECTRONICS
Uconnect® 430/430N
NOTE:
• Your radio may not be equipped with the Uconnect® Voice Command and Uconnect®
Phone features. To determine if your radio has these features, press the Voice Command
button on the radio. You will hear a voice prompt if you have the feature, or see a message
on the radio stating “Uconnect Phone not available” if you do not.
• Your radio has many features that add to the comfort and convenience of you and your
passengers. Some of these radio features should not be used when driving because they
take your eyes from the road or your attention from driving.
Clock Setting
• Turn the radio on, then touch the screen where the time is displayed.
• Touch the “USER CLOCK” soft-key (Navigation radio only).
• To adjust the hours, touch either the “HOUR FORWARD” or “HOUR BACKWARD” soft-key.
• To adjust the minutes, touch either the “MINUTE FORWARD” or “MINUTE BACKWARD”
soft-key.
• To save the new time setting, touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
35
ELECTRONICS
Menu
• Press the “MENU” hard-key to access the System Setup menu and the My Files menu.
• Press the “MENU” hard-key in an active mode (SAT, CD, AUX, etc.) to change mode
specific settings.
Equalizer, Balance And Fade
Audio Control Menu
• Press the “AUDIO” hard-key on the right
side of the radio.
• Use either the arrow soft-keys or the
cross-hair on the screen to change Balance and Fade. The “CENTER” soft-key
resets the settings.
• Touch the “Equalizer” soft-key and use
either the arrow soft-keys or the sliders on
the screen to adjust BASS, MID, and/or
TREBLE.
Display Settings
• Press the “MENU” hard-key and touch the
“Display Settings” soft-key to access the
Display Settings menu.
• Select the “Daytime Colors” soft-key to
switch to manual daytime mode and to
adjust the brightness of the display using
daytime colors.
• Select the “Nighttime Colors” soft-key to
switch to manual nighttime mode and to
adjust the brightness of the display using nighttime colors.
• Select the “Auto Color Mode” soft-key to switch to automatic daytime/nighttime mode
and to control the brightness of the display using the dimmer switch of the vehicle.
• Touch the “EXIT” soft-key to save your settings.
36
ELECTRONICS
Radio Operation
• To access Radio Mode, touch the “RADIO” hard-key on the left side of the faceplate, then
touch the “AM,” “FM” or “SAT” soft-key at the top of the screen to select the band.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the “Seek Up” or “Seek Down” soft-keys to seek through radio stations in AM, FM,
or SAT bands. Hold either Seek to bypass stations without stopping.
Store Radio Presets
• Select the radio band by touching either the “AM,” “FM,” or “SAT” soft-key.
• Find the station to store by either pressing the “Seek Up” or “Seek Down” soft-keys,
touching the “SCAN” soft-key, or by using the “DIRECT TUNE” soft-key.
• Once the station is found, touch and hold one of the “PRESET” soft-keys in the list to the
right, until the preset key flashes and the station text on the soft-key changes.
NOTE:
If the Presets are not visible on the right side of the screen, press the “Presets” soft-key.
37
ELECTRONICS
CD/DVD Disc Operation
• Press the “MEDIA” hard key to display the media source tabs at the top of the screen.
Select the source by touching the “HDD,” “DISC,” or “AUX” media source soft-key tab.
NOTE:
Your Touchscreen Radio will usually automatically switch to the appropriate mode when
something is first connected or inserted into the system.
Insert a CD/DVD Disc
• To insert a disc, press the “LOAD” hard-key.
• With the printed side upwards, insert the disc into the disc slot of the radio. The radio
pulls the disc in automatically and closes the flip screen. The radio selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recognized, and starts playing the first track. The display
shows “Reading...” during this process.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the “Seek Up” or “Seek Down” soft-keys to seek through tracks in Disc Mode.
Holding the “Seek Up” soft-key will fast forward through the track until the beginning of
the track is reached; if still held it will fast-forward through the next sequential track(s) (if
random play mode is not active) until released. Holding the “Seek Down” soft-key will
fast- reverse through the track until the beginning of the track is reached; if still held it will
fast-reverse through the next sequential track(s) (if random play mode is not active) until
released.
38
ELECTRONICS
Audio Jack Operation
• The AUX/Audio Jack provides a means to connect a portable audio device, such as an
MP3 player or an iPod®, to the vehicle’s sound system. This requires the use of a 3.5 mm
stereo audio patch cable.
• Press the “MEDIA” hard-key then the “AUX” soft-key to change the mode to auxiliary
device if the Audio Jack is connected, allowing the music from your portable device to
play through the vehicle's speakers.
• The functions of the portable device are controlled using the device itself, not the
buttons on the radio. However, the volume may be controlled using the radio or portable
device.
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Operation
• The Hard Disk Drive (HDD) mode gives you access to the audio files on the internal hard
disk drive. It functions similar to a CD player, with the exception that the internal HDD can
hold more tracks.
• It is also possible to import display pictures to the internal hard disk drive. The pictures
can be displayed on the right half of the radio screen.
• Before using the HDD mode, you will need to copy songs and pictures to the internal hard
drive. Songs and pictures can be added to the hard drive by using a CD or USB device (e.g.
thumb drive or memory stick).
NOTE:
• HDD supports only .jpg/JPEG formats for photos.
• WMA/MP3 Files and Selective Songs from a CD can also be added to the HDD. See the
Uconnect® 430/430N User's Manual for more information.
Copying Music From CD
• Press the “LOAD” hard-key.
• Insert a disc, then press the “MY FILES” hard-key and then select “MY MUSIC” soft-key.
• Touch the “Add Music Files to HDD” soft-key, then touch the “Disc” soft-key in the next
screen to start the process.
NOTE:
• You might need to select the folder or title
depending on the CD, then press “DONE”
to start the copy process.
• The copy progress is shown in the lower
left corner of the screen.
39
ELECTRONICS
Copying Music From USB
• The USB port on the radio face plate allows you to copy files to your hard drive. To access,
lift up the cover.
• Insert a USB device (e.g. thumb drive or memory stick), then select the “MY MUSIC”
soft-key.
• Touch the “Add Music Files to HDD” soft-key, then touch the “Front USB” soft-key in the
next screen.
• Select the folders or titles you would like
to copy, then touch the “SAVE” soft-key to
start the copy process. To copy all of the
titles touch the "ALL" soft-key, then press
the "SAVE" soft-key.
NOTE:
The copy progress is shown in the lower left
corner of the screen.
Copying Pictures To The HDD
• Insert either a CD or a USB device containing your pictures in JPEG format.
• Press the “MY FILES” hard-key.
• Touch the “My Pictures” soft-key to get an overview of the currently stored images, then
touch the “Add” soft-key.
• Touch the “Disc” or “USB” soft-key, then select the folders or pictures you wish to copy to
the HDD. Use the “PAGE” soft-keys to page through the list of pictures.
• Touch the desired pictures or press the “All” soft-key for all pictures. Confirm your
selections by touching the “SAVE” soft-key.
NOTE:
The copy progress is shown in the lower left
corner of the screen.
Display A Picture On The Radio Screen
• Once the import is complete, the pictures
will then be available in the “MY PICTURES” screen.
• Press the “MY FILES” hard-key, then
touch the “My Pictures” soft-key. Touch the desired picture, touch the “Set as Picture
View” soft-key and then touch the “Exit” soft-key. Finally, press the “MENU” hard-key and
touch the “Picture View” soft-key to display the chosen picture on the radio screen.
NOTE:
• A check mark in the “My Pictures” screen indicates the currently used picture.
• You can also delete pictures by touching the “Delete” soft-key.
40
ELECTRONICS
Playing Music From The HDD
• Press the “MEDIA” hard-key to display the media source tabs at the top of the screen.
Touch the “HDD” soft-key tab. Touch the desired track soft-key to play or touch the
“SEARCH/BROWSE” soft-key to search by artist, by album, by song, by genre, from a
folder, or from Favorites.
Cleaning Your Touchscreen Radio
• Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on the screen. Use a clean and dry
micro fiber lens cleaning cloth to clean the touchscreen.
• If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a cleaning solution such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Always follow the
solvent manufacturer's precautions and directions.
Garmin® Navigation
• Uconnect® 430N integrates Garmin’s consumer-friendly navigation into your vehicle.
Garmin® Navigation includes a database with over six million points of interest.
• Touch the “NAV” soft-key in the upper right corner of the screen to access the Navigation
system.
41
ELECTRONICS
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume
1. Program a destination.
2. While traveling on your route, touch the upper left area of the map screen where your
next turn is displayed.
3. The Navigation system will then repeat the distance to your next turn.
4. While the Navigation system is speaking, use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust
the volume to a comfortable level. Please note the volume setting for Navigation Voice
Prompt is different than the audio system.
NOTE:
For your own safety and the safety of others, it is not possible to use certain features while
the vehicle is in motion.
Main Navigation Menu
Finding Points Of Interest
• From the main Navigation menu, touch the “Where To?” soft-key, then touch the “Points
of Interest” soft-key.
• Select a Category, then a subcategory, if
necessary.
• Select your destination and touch the
“Go” soft-key.
Finding A Place By Spelling The Name
• From the Main Navigation Menu touch the
“Where To?” soft-key. Next, touch the
“Points of Interest” soft-key then touch
the “Spell Name” soft-key.
• Enter the name of your destination.
• Touch the “Done” soft-key.
• Select your destination and touch the “Go” soft-key.
Entering A Destination Address
• From the main Navigation menu touch the “Where To?” soft-key, then touch the “Address” soft-key.
• Follow the on-screen prompts to enter the address then touch the “Go” soft-key.
Setting Your Home Location
• From the main Navigation menu touch the "Tools" icon. Next select the "My Data" folder
icon. Then select "Set Home Location."
• You may enter your address directly, use your current location as your home address, or
choose from recently found locations.
42
ELECTRONICS
Edit Home Location
• From the main Navigation menu touch the “Where To?” soft-key, then touch the "Tools"
icon. Next, touch the "My Data" folder.
• You may enter a new address directly, use your current location or choose from recently
found locations.
Go Home
• A Home location must be saved in the system. From the Main Navigation menu, touch
the “Where To?” soft-key, then touch the “Go Home” soft-key.
Following Your Route
• Your route is marked with a magenta line on the map. If you depart from the original route,
your route is recalculated. A speed limit icon could appear as you travel on major
roadways.
Adding A Via Point
• To add a stop between the current location and the end destination (Via Point) you must
be navigating a route.
• Touch the “back arrow” icon multiple times to return to the Main Navigation menu.
• Touch the “Where To?” soft-key, then search for the additional stop. Select the destination you wish to add from the given search results.
• Touch the “Go” soft-key, then touch "Add as a Via Point" soft-key and press the "Done"
soft-key.
43
ELECTRONICS
Taking A Detour
• To take a detour you must be navigating a route.
• Touch the “back arrow” icon soft-key multiple times to return to the Main Navigation
menu.
• Touch the “Detour” soft-key.
NOTE:
If the route you are currently taking is the only reasonable option, the device might not
calculate a detour.
Acquiring Satellites
• The GPS Satellite strength bars indicate the strength of your satellite reception.
• Acquiring satellite signals can take a few minutes. When at least one of the bars is green,
your device has acquired satellite signals.
• You may experience delays receiving satellite signals when in areas with an obstructed
view to the sky, such as garages, tunnels, or large cities with tall buildings.
Uconnect® 730N
NOTE:
Your radio has many features that add to the comfort and convenience of you and your
passengers. Some of these radio features should not be used when driving because they
take your eyes from the road or your attention from driving.
44
ELECTRONICS
Clock Setting
• Turn the radio on, then touch the screen where the time is displayed.
• Touch the “USER CLOCK” soft-key.
• To adjust the hours, touch either the “HOUR FORWARD” or “HOUR BACKWARD” soft-key.
• To adjust the minutes, touch either the “MINUTE FORWARD” or “MINUTE BACKWARD”
soft-key.
• To save the new time setting, touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
Menu
• Press the “MENU” hard-key to access the System Setup menu and the My Files menu.
• Press the “MENU” hard-key in an active mode (SAT, CD, AUX, etc.) to change mode
specific settings.
Equalizer, Balance And Fade
Audio Control Menu
• Press the “MENU” hard-key on the right
side of the radio. Then press the “Audio
Control” soft-key to get to the audio control menu.
• Use either the arrow soft-keys or the
cross-hair on the screen to change Balance and Fade. The “CENTER” soft-key
resets the settings.
• Touch the “Equalizer” soft-key and use
either the arrow soft-keys or the sliders on the screen to adjust BASS, MID, and/or
TREBLE.
Display Settings
• Press the “MENU” hard-key and touch the
“Display Settings” soft-key to access the
Display Settings menu.
• Select the “Daytime Colors” soft-key to
switch to manual daytime mode and to
adjust the brightness of the display using
daytime colors.
• Select the “Nighttime Colors” soft-key to
switch to manual nighttime mode and to
adjust the brightness of the display using nighttime colors.
• Select the “Auto Color Mode” soft-key to switch to automatic daytime/ nighttime mode
and to control the brightness of the display using the dimmer switch of the vehicle.
• Touch the “EXIT” soft-key to save your settings.
45
ELECTRONICS
Radio Operation
• To access Radio Mode, touch the “RADIO/MEDIA” hard-key on the left side of the
faceplate repeatedly until AM/FM/SAT appears at the top of the screen, then touch the
“AM,” “FM” or “SAT” soft-key to select the band.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the “Seek Up” or “Seek Down” hard-keys to seek through radio stations in AM, FM,
or SAT bands. Hold either Seek to bypass stations without stopping.
Store Radio Presets
• Select the radio band by touching either the “AM,” “FM,” or “SAT” soft-key.
• Find the station to store by either pressing the “Seek Up” or “Seek Down” hard-keys,
touching the “SCAN” soft-key, or by using the “DIRECT TUNE” soft-key.
• Once the station is found, touch and hold one of the PRESET soft-keys in the list to the
right, until you hear a confirmation beep.
NOTE:
If the Presets are not visible on the right side of the screen, press the “Presets” soft-key.
46
ELECTRONICS
CD/DVD Disc Operation
• Press the “RADIO/MEDIA” hard-key until the media source tabs are displayed at the top
of the screen. Select the source by touching the “HDD,” “DISC,” or “AUX” media source
soft-key tab.
NOTE:
Your Touchscreen Radio will usually automatically switch to the appropriate mode when
something is first connected or inserted into the system.
Insert a CD/DVD Disc
• To insert a disc, press the “OPEN/CLOSE” hard-key.
• With the printed side upwards, insert the disc into the disc slot of the radio. The radio
pulls the disc in automatically and closes the flip screen. The radio selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recognized, and starts playing the first track. The display
shows “Reading...” during this process.
47
ELECTRONICS
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the “Seek Up” or “Seek Down” hard-keys to seek through tracks in Disc Mode. Hold
either Seek to bypass tracks without stopping.
Audio Jack Operation
• The AUX/Audio Jack provides a means to connect a portable audio device, such as an
MP3 player or an iPod®, to the vehicle’s sound system. This requires the use of a 3.5 mm
stereo audio patch cable.
• Press the “RADIO/MEDIA” hard-key, then the “AUX” soft-key to change the mode to
auxiliary device if the Audio Jack is connected, allowing the music from your portable
device to play through the vehicle's speakers.
• The functions of the portable device are controlled using the device itself, not the
buttons on the radio. The volume may be controlled using the radio or portable device.
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Operation
• The Hard Disk Drive (HDD) mode gives you access to the audio files on the internal hard
disk drive. It functions similar to a CD player, with the exception that the internal HDD can
hold more tracks.
• It is also possible to import display pictures to the internal hard disk drive. The pictures
can be displayed on the right half of the radio screen.
• Before using the HDD mode, you will need to copy songs and pictures to the internal hard
drive. Songs and pictures can be added to the hard drive by using a CD or USB device (e.g.
thumb drive or memory stick).
NOTE:
• HDD supports only .jpg/JPEG formats for photos.
• WMA/MP3 Files and Selective Songs from a CD can also be added to the HDD. See the
Uconnect® 730N Supplement Manual for more information.
48
ELECTRONICS
Copying Music From CD
• Press the “OPEN/CLOSE” hard-key.
• Insert a disc, then press the “MENU” hard-key.
• Touch the “MY FILES” soft-key, then select “MY MUSIC.”
• Touch the “Add Music Files to HDD” soft-key, then touch the “From Disc” soft-key in the
next screen to start the process.
NOTE:
• You might need to select the folder or title
depending on the CD, then press “Done”
to start the copy process.
• The copy progress is shown in the lower
left corner of the screen.
Copying Music From USB
• The USB port on the radio face plate allows you to copy files to your hard drive. To access,
lift up on the cover.
• Insert a USB device (e.g. thumb drive or memory stick), then select “MY FILES.”
• Touch the “MY MUSIC” soft-key, then touch the “Add Music Files” to HDD soft-key.
49
ELECTRONICS
• Touch the “From USB” soft-key, then select the folders or titles you would like to copy, and
then touch the “SAVE” soft-key to start the copy process.
NOTE:
The copy progress is shown in the lower left
corner of the screen.
Copying Pictures To The HDD
• Insert either a CD or a USB device containing your pictures in JPEG format.
• Press the “MENU” hard-key to access the Settings Menu, then touch the “My Files”
soft-key.
• Touch the “My Pictures” soft-key to get an overview of the currently stored images, then
touch the “Add” soft-key.
• Touch the “From Disc” or “From USB”
soft-key, then select the folders or pictures you wish to copy to the HDD. Use the
“PAGE” soft-keys to page through the list
of pictures.
• Touch the desired pictures or press the
“All” soft-key for all pictures. Confirm your
selections by touching the “SAVE”
soft-key.
NOTE:
The copy progress is shown in the lower left corner of the screen.
Display A Picture On The Radio Screen
• Once the import is complete, the pictures will then be available in the “MY PICTURES”
screen.
• Press the “MENU” hard-key to access the Settings Menu, then touch the “My Files”
soft-key and then touch the “My Pictures” soft-key. Touch the desired picture, then touch
the “Set as Picture View” soft-key and then touch the “Exit” soft-key. Lastly press the
“MENU” hard-key and then touch the “Picture View” soft-key to display the chosen
picture on the radio screen.
NOTE:
• A check mark in the My Pictures screen indicates the currently used picture.
• You can also delete pictures by touching the “Delete” soft-key.
50
ELECTRONICS
Playing Music From The HDD
• Press the “RADIO/MEDIA” hard-key until the media source tabs are displayed at the top
of the screen. Touch the “HDD” soft-key tab. Touch the desired track soft-key to play or
touch the “SEARCH/BROWSE” soft-key to search by artist, by album, by song, by genre,
from a folder, or from Favorites.
Cleaning Your Touchscreen Radio
• Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on the screen. Use a clean and dry
micro fiber lens cleaning cloth to clean the touchscreen.
• If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a cleaning solution such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Always follow the
solvent manufacturer's precautions and directions.
NAVIGATION
• Your navigation system receives GPS signals from up to 16 satellites to display the
position of your vehicle. Map and database information is supplied through a
hard disk drive.
• Touch the “NAV” hard-key on the radio
face plate to access the Navigation system and the NAV – Main Menu.
51
ELECTRONICS
Changing The Navigation Guidance Prompt Volume
1. From the Navigation Map screen, touch the Menu hard-key then touch the "NAV Settings"
soft-key. Next select "Guidance Prompts."
2. Select and adjust the navigation guidance prompt volume using the left and right
arrows.
3. Touch the “SAMPLE VOL” soft-key to listen to the current volume setting.
4. Once satisfied with the volume, touch the
“SAVE” soft-key to save the settings.
Touch the “CANCEL” soft-key to exit the
menu without saving the settings.
NOTE:
For your own safety and the safety of others,
it is not possible to use the certain features while the vehicle is in motion.
Main Navigation Menu
Finding Points Of Interest
• From the NAV main menu, touch the “Points of Interest” soft-key.
• Select a Category and then a subcategory, if necessary.
• Select your destination and touch “GO.”
52
ELECTRONICS
Finding A Place By Entering The Street Address
NOTE:
Tip: Entering the city or zip code before entering the street name facilitates address entry.
If the State and/or Country displayed are incorrect, touch the corresponding soft-key to
make the correction.
• From the NAV main menu, touch “New Destination,” then touch “Street Address.”
• Once the Country and State are set and the Street Address screen is displayed, begin
spelling the street name in the speller. In the upper right corner the number of possible
roads decreases.
• Touch the “LIST” soft-key to display a list of possible street names. Select the correct
street name.
• Next input the number.
• In the Confirm Route screen the navigation radio displays the complete address, a map
of the destination area, and the current routing method for you to verify.
• Touch the “GO” soft-key to activate the route guidance.
Entering Your Home Location
• Press the “NAV” hard-key on the right side of the radio.
• From the Nav – Main Menu, touch “Guide Me Home” to enter your home address. If no
home address has been set, touch “YES” to access the Enter Home Address menu.
• Touch “Street Address” to enter your address. Touch the soft-key with your state’s name
and enter your street name into the speller.
• Once the street name has been input, touch “CONTINUE” to confirm. Enter the house
number into the next screen. If more than one city has this address, you will then need to
select your city from a list.
• Once the address is entered completely, the system shows a map of your home address
area. Touch “SAVE” to confirm the address. The system will then ask if you want to go
there. Touch the “Yes” or “No” soft-key.
Change Home Address
NOTE:
This procedure will allow you to change your Home Address if one has already been entered.
Entering the city or zip code before entering the street name facilitates address entry.
• Press the “MENU” hard-key, touch “My Files” and then touch “My Address Book.”
• Touch “Home,” then touch “Edit Contacts” and then “Change Address.”
• Touch the soft-key with your state’s name and enter your street name into the speller.
• Once the street name has been input, touch “CONTINUE” to confirm.
• Enter the house number into the next screen. If more than one city has this address, you
will then need to select your city from a list.
• Touch the “SAVE” soft-key to confirm the address.
53
ELECTRONICS
Go Home
• From the NAV main menu, touch “Guide Me Home” when you want to route to your home
destination.
Where Am I Now?
• From the NAV main menu, touch “Where Am I Now?” The Where Am I Now? menu
displays location information for the current vehicle position.
• Touch the “NEARBY POI” soft-key to search for a local Point of Interest.
• Touch the “SAVE LOCATION” soft-key to save the current location in the Saved Locations
memory.
Route Guidance
• After starting route guidance, the system calculates the route and announces: “Follow
the arrows on the display.” You will receive navigation recommendations by voice messages and screen displays.
54
ELECTRONICS
Route Options
• After pressing the “OPTIONS” soft-key in the Route Guidance Menu, the following
information is displayed:
• In the left half of the screen, the current position and the current routing method are
displayed.
• “Take Detour” will allow you to calculate a different route.
• “Find Nearby POI” to search for a local POI.
• “Destination Info” displays destination information.
• “View Turn List” lists streets utilized for the current route.
• “Save Destination” to save the destination address.
• “Change Method” will allow you to change the routing method.
SiriusXM SATELLITE RADIO/TRAVEL LINK
• SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription, sold separately after the 1 year trial subscription included with your vehicle purchase.
• SiriusXM Travel Link is only available in the United States.
• The following describes features that are available when in SiriusXM Satellite Radio
mode.
• To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, press the “RADIO/MEDIA” or “RADIO” and then touch
the “SAT” soft-key tab.
Info
• Touch the “i” soft-key to view detailed information about the current Sirius XM Satellite
channel.
SiriusXM Parental Controls
• SiriusXM offers the option to permanently block selected channels. Call 1-888-539-7474
and request the Family Package.
• Uconnect® 430/430N and 730N: Press the “MENU” hard-key while in SiriusXM Satellite
Radio Mode, then touch the “Channel Lock” to enable and/or disable desired channels.
The SEEK and SCAN function will then only display channels without Channel lock.
55
ELECTRONICS
Search/Browse
• Touch the “magnifying glass” soft-key to search/browse the SiriusXM channel listing by
Favorites and Categories such as Song, Artist and Channel Name. The Search/Browse
also allows you manage your Favorites.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Favorites (SAT Favorites)
• You can save 50 favorite songs and 50 favorite artists.
• Touch the “Add Favorite” soft-key to add
either the song or the artist of the currently playing program to the SAT Favorites list. The favorite star will appear in the
upper right corner, below the “SAT” softkey.
• You will see a favorite star indicator in the
upper right side of the screen below the
“SAT” soft-key and a pop up will alert you
that a favorite song or artist is currently playing on one of the SiriusXM satellite radio
channels.
NOTE:
Refer to your Uconnect® 730N or 430/430N
Supplement Manual for more information.
56
ELECTRONICS
Display SAT Favorites List
• Touch the “Search/Browse” soft-key and select “Favorites” from the SAT Browse screen.
• Touch the desired favorites soft-key to
switch the SAT tuner to the corresponding
channel.
• You may use the “LIST” soft-key to toggle
between:
• Favorite Songs
• Favorite Artists
• Currently playing favorites
Replay
• While you are in SAT mode, you can replay 44 minutes of the current SiriusXM channel
(when the channel is changed, this audio buffer is erased). Press the REPLAY button to
listen to the stored audio.
• You can touch the on-screen controls to
pause and rewind audio playback, touch
the SCAN button to preview each of the
tracks stored in the buffer, or select a
track from the list.
• The time displayed below the bar indicates how much time is present between
the current buffer play position and the
live broadcast.
Replay Option
Play/Pause
Rewind/RW
Fast Forward/FW
Replay Time
Live
Option Description
Touch to pause content playback. Touch Pause/Play again to resume
playback.
Rewinds the channel content in steps of five seconds. Touch and hold to
rewind continuously, then release to begin playing content at that point.
Forwards the content, and works similarly to Rewind/RW. However, Fast
Forward/FW can only be used when content has been previously rewound.
Displays the amount of time in the upper center of the screen by which your
content lags the live channel.
Resumes playback of live content at any time while replaying rewound
content.
57
ELECTRONICS
SiriusXM Travel Link (Uconnect® 730N & Uconnect® 430N Only)
NOTE:
• SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription, sold separately after the 1 year trial subscription included with your vehicle purchase.
• SiriusXM Travel Link is only available in the United States.
• SiriusXM Travel Link brings a wealth of useful information into your vehicle and right to
your fingertips.
• To access Travel Link, press the MENU hard-key, then the Travel Link soft-key.
4 – Fuel Prices
View and store your favorite location, theater and sport teams
for quick access.
View detailed weather conditions, forecasts and ski/
snowboarding conditions at resorts.
View ski and snowboarding conditions at ski resorts.
View detailed price information for fuel stations.
5 – Movies
6 – Sports
View information on movies that are playing at theaters.
View sports scores and upcoming events for all major sports.
1 – Favorites
2 – Forecast
3 – Ski Info
58
ELECTRONICS
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
• The steering wheel audio controls are located on the rear surface of the steering
wheel.
Right Switch
• Press the switch up or down to increase or
decrease the volume.
• Press the button in the center to change
modes AM/FM/CD/SAT.
Left Switch
• Press the switch up or down to search for
the next listenable station or select the next or previous CD track.
• Press the button in the center to select the next preset station (radio) or to change CDs if
equipped with a CD Changer.
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL
• There are many ways to play music from iPod®/MP3 players or USB devices through your
vehicle's sound system.
• The remote USB port, located within the front storage area, allows you to plug an iPod®
into the vehicle's sound system.
NOTE:
If equipped with the Uconnect® 730N, the
USB port on the faceplate allows the same
functions as the remote USB port.
• Non-Touchscreen Radios: To hear audio
from devices connected to the USB port,
press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate.
59
ELECTRONICS
• Touchscreen Radios: To hear audio from devices connected to the USB port, press the
“MEDIA” hard-key, then touch the “AUX” or “iPod®” soft-key.
• When connected to this feature:
• The iPod® can be controlled using the
radio buttons to Play, Browse, and List
the iPod® or external devices contents.
• The iPod® battery charges when
plugged into the USB port (if supported
by the specific audio device).
• Compatible iPod® devices may also be
controllable using voice commands. Refer to the Owner's Manual on the DVD for
details.
NOTE:
The USB port supports certain Mini, Classic, Nano, Touch, and iPhone® devices. The USB
port also supports playing music from compatible external USB Mass Storage Class
memory devices. For supported audio file formats, refer to the USB Port section in the
Owner's Manual on the DVD. Refer to www.UconnectPhone.com website for a list of tested
iPod®s. Some iPod® software versions may not fully support the USB port features. Please
visit Apple’s website for iPod® software updates.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external device while driving. Failure to follow this
warning could result in a collision.
Uconnect® Phone
• To determine if your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect® Phone, press the “Uconnect®
located on the radio faceplate. If your vehicle has this feature, you
Phone” button
will hear a voice prompt. If not, you will see a message on the radio “Uconnect® Phone not
available.”
• The Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle communications
system with Voice Command Capability (see Voice Command section).
NOTE:
. After the BEEP, say
To access the tutorial, press the “Uconnect® Phone” button
“tutorial.” Press any hard-key/button or touch the display (Touchscreen radio) to cancel the
“tutorial.”
• The Uconnect® Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using
simple voice commands.
• Refer to your vehicle Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.
60
ELECTRONICS
NOTE:
The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Profile, Version 1.0 or higher. For Uconnect® Customer Support: U.S. residents - visit
www.UconnectPhone.com or call 1–877–855–8400. Canadian residents - visit
www.UconnectPhone.com or call, 1-800-465–2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
This site will provide specific instructions based on the type of mobile phone being paired.
Phone Pairing
NOTE:
Pairing is a one - time initial setup before using the phone. Prior to starting the pairing
procedure ensure all additional phones within the vehicle have their Bluetooth® disabled.
• Press the “Phone”
button to begin.
• Wait for the “ready” prompt and BEEP.
• After the BEEP, say ”setup” or “Uconnect device setup.”
• After the BEEP, say “device pairing.”
• After the BEEP, say “pair a device.”
• Follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which
you will later need to enter into your mobile phone. You can say any four-digit PIN.
You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
• You will then be prompted to give the phone pairing a name (each phone paired should
have a unique name).
• Next you will be asked to give this new pairing a priority of 1 through 7 (up to seven phones
may be paired); 1 is the highest and 7 is the lowest priority. The system will only connect
to the highest priority phone that exists within the proximity of the vehicle.
• You will then need to start the pairing procedure on your cell phone. Follow the
Bluetooth® instructions in your cell phone Owner's Manual to complete the phone pairing
setup.
61
ELECTRONICS
Phonebook
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone
• If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automatically
downloads names (text names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this
feature. Automatic Transfer is indicated by a green arrow at the bottom of the screen. See
www.UconnectPhone.com for supported phones.
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth®
wireless phone connection is made to the
Uconnect® Phone. For example, after you
start the vehicle.
NOTE:
The mobile phone may require authorization
prior to download.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will
be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect® Phone.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay
before the latest downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously
downloaded phonebook is available for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible.
• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded. The SIM card phonebook is not part
of the Mobile phonebook.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect® Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated
to Uconnect® Phone on the next phone connection.
Making A Phone Call
• Press the “Phone” button
.
• After the BEEP, say “dial” (or “call” a name).
• After the BEEP, say number (or name).
Receiving A Call – Accept (And End)
• When an incoming call rings/is announced on Uconnect®, press the Phone button
• To end a call, press the Phone button
.
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Call
• During a call, press the “Voice Command” button
• After the BEEP, say “mute” (or “mute off”).
62
.
.
ELECTRONICS
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And Vehicle
• During a call, press the “Voice Command” button
.
• After the BEEP, say “transfer call.”
Changing The Volume
• Start a dialogue by pressing the “Phone” button
normal call.
, then adjust the volume during a
• Use the radio ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level
while the Uconnect® system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for Uconnect®
is different than the audio system.
WARNING!
•
•
Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following applicable laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision causing you and others
to be severely injured or killed.
In an emergency, to use Uconnect® Phone, your mobile phone must be:
• turned on,
• paired to Uconnect® Phone,
• and have network coverage.
Uconnect® VOICE COMMAND
Voice Command Operation
• The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite
radio, disc player, HDD, Uconnect® Phone, a memo recorder, and supported portable
media devices.
located on the radio faceplate or
• When you press the “Voice Command” button
steering wheel, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a command. If you do
not say a command within a few seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options. If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options, press the “Voice
, listen for the BEEP, and say your command.
Command” button
NOTE:
Visit http://www.driveuconnect.com/features/voiceCommand/ for more info on which
voice command features apply to your vehicle.
63
ELECTRONICS
• Start a dialogue by pressing the “Voice Command” button
, you will hear a beep.
The beep is your signal to give a command. Below are a list of voice commands for each
of the different modes.
Common Voice Commands (Examples)
While In:
Main Menu
Radio Mode
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Mode
Disc Mode
64
Voice Command Example:
“Radio AM” (to switch to the AM radio mode)
“Radio FM” (to switch to the FM radio mode)
“Satellite Radio” (to switch to the Satellite radio mode)
“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
“USB” (to switch to the USB mode)
“Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to the Bluetooth Streaming
mode)
“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
“System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
“Frequency” (to change the frequency)
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its spoken number)
“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
"Channel Name" (to change the channel by its spoken name)
“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
“Track” (#) (to change the track)
“Next Track” (to play the next track)
“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
ELECTRONICS
While In:
Memo Mode
Voice Command Example:
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” The following
are common voice commands for this mode: “New Memo” (to
record a new memo) — During the recording, you may press the
to stop recording. You proceed
Voice Command button
by saying one of the following commands:
— “Save” (to save the memo)
— “Continue” (to continue recording)
— “Delete” (to delete the recording)
— “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) — During
the playback you may press the Voice Command button
to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one of the following commands:
— “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
— “Next” (to play the next memo)
— “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
— “Delete” (to delete a memo)
— “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
Voice Text Reply
• If equipped with Uconnect® Voice Command, your Uconnect® 430N / 730N radio may be
able to play incoming Short Message Service (SMS) messages (text messages) through
the vehicle's sound system.
• It also allows you to respond by selecting from various predefined phrases.
• Not all phones are compatible with this feature. Refer to the phone compatibility list at
www.UconnectPhone.com. Connected mobile phones must be bluetooth-compatible
and paired with your radio.
• Press the “Voice Command” button
and after the BEEP, say “SMS” to get started.
NOTE:
To access the tutorial, press the “Voice Command” button
. After the BEEP, say
“tutorial.” Press any hard-key/button or touch the display (Touchscreen radio) to cancel the
tutorial.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following
applicable laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision causing you and others to be
severely injured or killed.
65
ELECTRONICS
Bluetooth® STREAMING AUDIO
• If equipped with Uconnect® Voice Command, your Bluetooth-equipped iPod®
devices, cell phones or other media players, may also be able to stream music to
your vehicles speakers. Your connected
device must be Bluetooth-compatible,
and paired with your radio (see
www.UconnectPhone.com for pairing instructions).
• Non-Touchscreen Radios: Press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate until "BT" or
“Audio Streaming” is displayed on the radio screen.
• Touchscreen-Radios: Press the “RADIO/MEDIA” or “MEDIA” hard-key and then touch the
“AUX” soft-key tab.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC)
• The EVIC features a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster. Pressing the controls on the left
side of the steering wheel allows the
driver to select vehicle information and
Personal Settings. For additional information, refer to “Programmable Features” located in this guide.
• Press and release the MENU button to
advance the display to Trip Functions or
Personal settings or to return to the default System status display.
button to advance the display through the various Trip
• Press and release the DOWN
Functions or Personal Settings.
• Press and release the COMPASS
outside temperature.
• Press and release the SELECT
resets various Trip Functions.
button to display the compass heading and the
button to accept a selection. The SELECT Button also
Compass Calibration
• This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display
“CAL” until the compass is calibrated.
• You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns (in an
area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
66
ELECTRONICS
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• The EVIC can be used to program the following Personal Settings. Press and release the
MENU button until Personal Settings displays, then press the DOWN button
to scroll
to change the setting.
through the settings. Press the SELECT button
• Language
• Auto Unlock On Exit
• RKE Unlock
• Sound Horn With Lock
• Flash Lamps With Lock
• Headlamp Off Delay
• Headlights With Wipers
(Available with Auto Headlights Only)
• Key Off Power Delay
• Illumin. Approach
• Display Units In
• Calibrate Compass
• Compass Variance
Key Fob Programmable Features
• The following features may also be programmed by using the Key Fob transmitter or the
ignition switch and driver's door lock switch.
NOTE:
Pressing the LOCK button while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to
sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Unlock On First Press
• To unlock either the driver's side, or all doors, on the first press of the UNLOCK button:
• Press and hold the LOCK button for at least four seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button.
• Release both buttons at the same time.
Auto Unlock Doors On Exit
• To have all of the vehicle doors unlock when any door is opened:
• Enter your vehicle and close all the doors, and fasten your seat belt.
• Cycle the ignition switch between the LOCK and ON position four times, ending in the
LOCK position (do not start the engine).
• Press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors. A single chime will indicate
that programming is complete.
Sound Horn With Lock
• To turn the horn chirp on or off when the doors are locked:
• Press the LOCK button for at least four seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then,
press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button.
• Release both buttons at the same time.
67
ELECTRONICS
Flashing Lights With Lock
• The turn signal lights flashing, when the doors are locked or unlocked, feature can be
turned on or off. To turn this feature on or off:
• Press and hold the UNLOCK button for at least four seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK
button.
• Release both buttons at the same time.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HomeLink®)
• HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
• The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the overhead console or sunvisor designate
the three different HomeLink® channels.
• The HomeLink® indicator is located above the center button.
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®
• Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside
of the garage before you begin programming.
• For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended that a new battery
be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to
the HomeLink® system.
• Erase all channels before you begin programming. To erase the channels, place
the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position, then press and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to
20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink® for the first
time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or,
on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
68
ELECTRONICS
Programming A Rolling Code
• For programming Garage Door Openers that were manufactured after 1995. These Garage
Door Openers can be identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the Garage Door Opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you
wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink® button you want to program and the
hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator
will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the frequency signal
from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING”
button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener motor. Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button.
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been
pressed.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink® button twice (holding the
button for two seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and activates, programming is complete.
NOTE:
If the device does not activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
7. To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
69
ELECTRONICS
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
• For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you
wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink® button you want to program and the
hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator
will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the frequency signal
from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door
(or device) should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Using HomeLink®
• To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Activation will now
occur for the programmed device (e.g., garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time.
WARNING!
•
•
70
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people or pets are in the path
of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or confined area while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and can cause
you and others to be severely injured or killed.
ELECTRONICS
POWER OUTLET
• There are two 12 Volt electrical outlets on
this vehicle.
• The instrument panel power outlet, located below the climate control knobs,
has power available only when the ignition is ON. This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit.
• There is also a power outlet located on the
inside of the center console. This power
outlet is powered directly from the battery
(power available at all times). Items
plugged into this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the engine from starting.
NOTE:
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt
(13 Amp) power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need to be
replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the
power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
71
72
Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings
Max. Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
1,000 lbs (450 kg)
11 sq ft (1.0 sq.m) (See Note 2)
22 sq. ft. (2.0 sq. m)
1,000 lbs (450 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt. 1
100 lbs (45 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
Towing a trailer with a larger than recommended frontal area could cause the engine to overheat or cause severe engine damage under
extreme conditions.
CAUTION!
Enclosed trailers or open utility trailers with front shields/guards are not recommended for use with four-cylinder engines with an automatic
transmission. Please see your authorized dealer for additional information.
2
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and it should never exceed the weight
referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
1
Engine/Transmission
2.4L/Auto
3.6L/Auto
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
UTILITY
UTILITY
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Wheels OFF the
Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
All Models
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
Recreational Towing – All Models
• Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground. This may be
accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
• Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
• Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
• Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in PARK.
• Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
• Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
•
•
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
73
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
• Dial toll-free 1-800-521-2779 for U.S. Residents or 1-800-363-4869 for Canadian Residents.
• Provide your name, vehicle identification number, license plate number, and your location, including the telephone number from which you are calling.
• Briefly describe the nature of the problem and answer a few simple questions.
• You will be given the name of the service provider and an estimated time of arrival. If you
feel you are in an “unsafe situation”, please let us know. With your consent, we will
contact local police or safety authorities.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WARNING LIGHTS
- Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
• If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), we recommend you do not operate the
vehicle. Have the vehicle serviced immediately.
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” starts to flash as soon as the tires lose
traction and the ESC system becomes active. If the light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. The light also flashes
when TCS is active. To improve the vehicle's traction when starting off in deep snow, sand
or gravel, it may be desirable to switch the ESC system to Partial Off mode by momenswitch.
tarily pressing the ESC Off
- Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
• This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Light
• Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
• As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
74
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• IF THE LIGHT STARTS FLASHING INDICATING A LOW TIRE PRESSURE, ADJUST THE AIR
PRESSURE IN THE LOW TIRE TO THE AIR PRESSURE SHOWN ON THE VEHICLE PLACARD OR TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE LABEL LOCATED ON THE DRIVER'S DOOR.
NOTE:
AFTER INFLATION, THE VEHICLE MAY NEED TO BE DRIVEN FOR 20 MINUTES BEFORE THE
FLASHING LIGHT WILL TURN OFF.
• Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
• Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue each time the vehicle is restarted as long as the malfunction
exists.
• When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that
the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
NOTE:
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12° F (7° C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter. Example: If garage temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature is 32°F
(0°C), then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
75
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
- Engine Temperature Warning Light
• This light warns of an overheated engine condition.
• If the light turns on or flashes continuously while driving, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off
immediately.
• We recommend that you do not operate the vehicle or engine damage will occur. Have the
vehicle serviced immediately.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant.
BRAKE - Brake Warning Light
• The Brake Warning light illuminates when there is either a system malfunction or the
parking brake is applied. If the light is on and the parking brake is not applied, it indicates
a possible brake hydraulic malfunction, brake booster problem or an Anti-Lock Brake
System problem.
• Please have your vehicle serviced immediately.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
- Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
• Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, etc., may
illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally
and not require towing.
• If the MIL flashes when the engine is running, serious conditions may exist that could
lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. We recommend
you do not operate the vehicle. Have the vehicle serviced immediately.
- Charging System Light
• This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the charging system light
remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system.
• We recommend you do not continue driving if the charging system light is on. Have the
vehicle serviced immediately.
76
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
- Oil Pressure Warning Light
• This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
• We recommend you do not operate the vehicle or engine damage will occur. Have the
vehicle serviced immediately.
- Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
• This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS).
• If the light is not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, we recommend you
drive to the nearest authorized dealer immediately and have the vehicle serviced
immediately.
- Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Indicator Light
• This light informs you of a problem with the system.
• If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the
ignition when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the
PARK position; the light should turn off.
• If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer immediately. If the light is flashing when the engine is
running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance,
an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
- Transmission Temperature Warning Light
• This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might
occur with severe usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle, with the transmission in NEUTRAL, until the light turns off. Once
the light turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
- Air Bag Warning Light
• If the light is not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the vehicle
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
77
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Fuel Cap/Loose Gas Cap Message
• If a “gas cap” message (shown as Check Fuel Cap) appears, tighten the gas cap until a
“clicking” sound is heard.
• Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off.
• If the message continues to appear for more than three days after tightening the gas cap,
see your authorized service center.
Oil Change Indicator
Message
• If an “oil change” message (shown as CHANgE OIL) appears and a single chime sounds,
it is time for your next required oil change.
Resetting The Light After Servicing
• Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do not start engine).
• Fully depress the accelerator pedal three times within 10 seconds.
• Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
• In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, shift transmission into NEUTRAL, but do not increase
engine idle speed.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the Temperature Control to maximum heat, the Mode Control to floor
and the Fan Control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.
• If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately.
• We recommend that you do not operate the vehicle or engine damage will occur. Have the
vehicle serviced immediately.
Engine Oil Overheating — 2.4L Gas
• On hot days the engine oil temperature may become too hot during sustained highspeed driving or if towing a trailer up long grades. If this happens, a HOTOIL message will
flash in the odometer and the vehicle speed will be reduced to 48 mph (77 km/h)
maximum until the engine oil temperature is reduced.
78
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE:
Although the maximum vehicle speed is reduced to 48 mph (77 km/h), you may reduce
vehicle speed further as needed. Once the engine oil temperature is reduced, you may
continue to drive normally.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner
turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
HOT (H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until
the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Jack Location
• The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor in the trunk.
Spare Tire Stowage
• The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor in the trunk.
Spare Tire Removal
• Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic
transmission) or REVERSE (manual
transmission).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
79
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench
from the spare wheel as an assembly.
Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen
the lug wrench, and remove the wrench
from the jack assembly.
NOTE:
The jack handle attaches to the side of the
jack with two attachment points. When the
jack is partially expanded, the tension between the two attachment points holds the
jack handle in place.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel
nuts by turning them to the left one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
80
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. There is a front and rear jacking location on each side of the vehicle.
4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location.
Once the jack is positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly
engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed. Do not raise the vehicle
until you are sure the jack is securely engaged.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right, using the swivel wrench. Raise the
vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to
install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
6. Remove the wheel nuts, and pull the wheel and wheel covers (where applicable) off the
hub. Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack
screw to the left.
8. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug
nuts in a star pattern until each nut has
been tightened twice. The correct wheel
nut torque is 100 ft lbs (135 N·m). If you
doubt that you have tightened the nuts
correctly, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer
or at a service station.
9. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is free. Reassemble the lug wrench
to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using the
means provided.
10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area and have the tire repaired or replaced as
soon as possible.
11. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct the tire pressure as required.
81
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with wheel covers, install two lug nuts
on the mounting studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the lug nuts with
the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover
with the valve stem on the wheel. Install
the cover by hand, snapping the cover
over the two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the
cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the
cone shaped end of the nut toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
1 — Valve Stem
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down 2 — Valve Notch
on the wrench while at the end of the 3 — Wheel Lug Nut
handle for increased leverage. Tighten
the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135
N·m). If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
your authorized dealer or service station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug
nuts are properly seated against the wheel.
82
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or service station.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug
nuts are properly seated against the wheel.
CAUTION!
•
•
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated
in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could
be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
83
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
84
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and
fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that
is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where
it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not
be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm
level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or
damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK; a
manual transmission in REVERSE.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the ground.
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove
the tire.
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact
with any sharp edges.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the
occupants in the vehicle. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully
until the vehicle is lowered to the ground. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
BATTERY LOCATION
• The battery in your vehicle is located between the left front headlight assembly and the
left front wheel splash shield. To allow jump-starting there are remote battery posts
located on the left side of the engine compartment.
JUMP-STARTING
• If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-started using a set of jumper
cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack.
Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in
this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
85
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jump-Start
• The battery in your vehicle is located between the left front headlight assembly and the
left front wheel splash shield. To allow jump-starting there are remote battery posts
located on the left side of the engine compartment.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post. To remove
the cover, press the locking tab and pull
upward on the cover.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the
battery, park the vehicle within the
jumper cables reach, set the parking
brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
Jump-Starting Procedure
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post
of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
86
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of
the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post of the discharged
vehicle.
NOTE:
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
•
•
•
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the
vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery discharges sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
87
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
When temperatures are below the freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery
may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting because the battery could rupture or
explode and cause personal injury. Battery temperature must be brought above the
freezing point before attempting a jump-start.
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is on. You can be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry, such as watch bands or bracelets, that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact. You could be severely injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen
gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the
battery.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection
and personal injury could result.
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage
due to battery explosion.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the discharged battery. The
resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
• If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you
can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
• To access the shift lever override, remove the cupholder liner.
• Firmly set the parking brake.
• Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position without starting the engine.
• Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
• Using a screwdriver or similar tool, press and hold the override tab through the access
port on the center console.
• Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
• The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
• Reinstall the override cover.
88
FWD With a Key
FWD Without a Key
Model
Flat Towing (all four wheels Flatbed Towing (all four Front Wheels Raised, Rear Rear Wheels Raised, Front
on the ground)
wheels suspended OFF the Wheels on the Ground
Wheels on the Ground
ground)
NOT Permitted
Recommended Method
May Be Used
NOT Permitted without a
front end dolly
Shift lever must be in NEU- Recommended Method
May Be Used
NOT Permitted without a
TRAL. The distance to be
front end dolly
traveled must not exceed
15 mi (25 km), and the towing speed must not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
89
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
• If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved by a rocking
motion. Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels.
Then move the shift lever back and forth between REVERSE and DRIVE. Using minimal
accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels,
is most effective.
NOTE:
To improve the vehicle's traction when starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may be
desirable to switch the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) to “Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the ESC Off
switch. For further information on ESC, refer to the Owner's
Manual on the DVD.
CAUTION!
•
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between REVERSE and DRIVE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) when you are stuck. Do not let anyone
near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
90
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
• This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety
systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened.
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
• These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
• To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties such
as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
91
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
OPENING THE HOOD
• Pull the release lever located below the
instrument panel and in front of the driver’s door.
• Raise the hood and locate the safety
latch, in the middle of the hood opening.
• Move the safety latch while lifting the
hood at the same time.
• Insert the support rod into the slot on the
hood.
• To close the hood, remove the support rod
and place it in the retaining clip, then
lower the hood slowly.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.
92
2.4L Engine
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
93
3.6L Engine
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
94
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Capacities
7.7 Quarts (7.3 Liters)
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/ Includes heater and
Engine Coolant– 2.4L
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT
coolant recovery
Engine
(Organic Additive Technology).
bottle filled to MAX
level.
11.6 Quarts (11 Liters)
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/ Includes heater and
Engine Coolant– 3.6L
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT
coolant recovery
Engine
(Organic Additive Technology).
bottle filled to MAX
level.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE
5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements
Engine Oil with Filter– of Chrysler Material Standard MS- 6395 such 4.5 Quarts (4.26 Li2.4L Engine
as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix ®. Reters)
fer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE
5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements
Engine Oil with Filter– of Chrysler Material Standard MS- 6395 such
6 Quarts (5.6 Liters)
3.6L Engine
as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix ®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
Fuel Selection – All
16.9 Gallons (64 LiEngines (Except 2.4L
87 Octane
ters) (Approximate)
PZEV)
Fuel Selection– 2.4L
18.5 Gallons (70 Li87 Octane
PZEV Engine
ters) (Approximate)
We recommend you use MOPAR® brand EnEngine Oil Filter
—
gine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs 2.4L–
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs
—
Except PZEV Engine
(Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
Spark Plugs 2.4L–
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs
—
With PZEV Engine
(Gap 0.031 in [0.8 mm]).
Spark Plugs– 3.6L
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs
—
Engine
(Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
Use only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission
Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4® fluid may affect
Automatic Transmisthe function or performance of your trans—
sion
mission. We recommend MOPAR® ATF+4®
fluid.
95
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Capacities
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 and
SAE J1703. If DOT 3 is not available, then DOT
—
4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power
Steering Fluid + 4 or MOPAR® ATF+4® Auto—
matic Transmission Fluid.
CAUTION!
•
•
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is
different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a
non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not
use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
E85 FLEXIBLE FUEL — 3.6L ENGINE ONLY
Refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator
system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate.
This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
96
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your
authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or
twelve months, whichever comes first.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road
environment. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, power steering and
transmission (four-speed only) and fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance
intervals.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil
indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
97
X
Adjust parking brake as necessary
X
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer
towing.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Replace spark plugs (3.6L Engine). **
X
X
X
X
X
Replace spark plugs (2.4L PZEV Engine
Only). **
Replace spark plugs (2.4L Engine). **
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter.
Replace engine air filter.
X
X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary.
Additional Maintenance
X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot
seals and replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Or Kilometers:
X
20,000
32,000
X
48,000
X
64,000
X
80,000
X
96,000
X
112,000
Additional Inspections
15
14
13
12
30,000
11
40,000
10
50,000
9
60,000
8
70,000
7
80,000
128,000
6
90,000
144,000
5
100,000
160,000
4
110,000
176,000
3
120,000
192,000
2
130,000
208,000
Or Years:
140,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first)
150,000
224,000
98
240,000
Maintenance Chart
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
96,000
80,000
64,000
48,000
20,000
32,000
Or Kilometers:
80,000
70,000
60,000
50,000
40,000
30,000
•
•
90,000
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and
performance. This could cause an accident.
WARNING!
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
X
7
112,000
X
8
128,000
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter.
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
144,000
6
100,000
160,000
5
110,000
176,000
4
120,000
192,000
3
130,000
208,000
2
140,000
224,000
Or Years:
150,000
240,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
99
100
20,000 Miles
(32,000 km) or
2 Years
30,000 Miles
(48,000 km) or
3 Years
40,000 Miles
(64,000 km) or
4 Years
50,000 Miles
(80,000 km) or
5 Years
60,000 Miles
(96,000 km) or
6 Years
70,000 Miles
(112,000 km) or
7 Years
80,000 Miles
(128,000 km) or
8 Years
Odometer
Date
MAINTENANCE RECORD
Signature,
Authorized Service Center
90,000 Miles
(144,000 km) or
9 Years
100,000 Miles
(160,000 km) or
10 Years
110,000 Miles
(176,000 km) or
11 Years
120,000 Miles
(192,000 km) or
12 Years
130,000 Miles
(208,000 km) or
13 Years
140,000 Miles
(224,000 km) or
14 Years
150,000 Miles
(240,000 km) or
15 Years
Odometer
Date
Signature,
Authorized Service Center
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES
Integrated Power Module (fuses)
• The Integrated Power Module (fuses) is located in the engine compartment near the air
cleaner assembly. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses.
Cavity
1
2
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green
—
Mini Fuse
—
20 Amp Yellow
3
—
10 Amp Red
4
5
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
—
40 Amp Green
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
30 Amp Green
30 Amp Green
10
—
20 Amp Yellow
11
—
15 Amp Lt Blue
12
13
14
15
16
—
—
—
40 Amp Green
—
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
—
15 Amp Lt. Blue
17
—
10 Amp Red
18
40 Amp Green
—
Description
Power Top Module – If Equipped
Brake Vacuum Pump
Center High Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL)/Brake Switch
Ignition Switch
Trailer Tow – If Equipped
Power Mirror Switch/Climate Controls
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) Sense 1
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) Sense 2
Battery Feed – Power Seats – If Equipped
Instrument Panel/Power Locks/Interior
Lights
Selectable Power Outlet (Inside Center
Arm Rest)
Spare
Ignition/Cigar Lighter
Instrument Panel
Radiator Fan Relay
Sunroof – If Equipped
Wireless Control Module (WCM)/Clock/
Steering Control Module (SCM)
Auto Shutdown (ASD) Relay
101
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
19
20
21
Cartridge Fuse
—
—
—
Mini Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Lt. Blue
10 Amp Red
22
—
10 Amp Red
23
24
—
—
15 Amp Lt. Blue
25 Amp Natural
25
—
10 Amp Red
26
—
15 Amp Lt. Blue
27
—
10 Amp Red
28
—
10 Amp Red
29
30
31
32
—
—
—
30 Amp Pink
—
20 Amp Yellow
—
—
33
—
10 Amp Red
34
30 Amp Pink
—
35
40 Amp Green
—
36
30 Amp Pink
—
37
—
25 Amp Natural
Description
Audio Amplifier – If Equipped
Radio
Siren – If Equipped
Ignition Run – Climate Controls/Hot Cupholder – If Equipped
Auto Shutdown (ASD) Relay 3
Sunroof – If Equipped
Ignition Run — Heated Mirrors - If
Equipped
Auto Shutdown (ASD) Relay 2
Ignition Run – Occupant Classification
Module (OCM)/Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Ignition Run — Occupant Classification
Module (OCM)/Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Hot Car (No Fuse Required)
Ignition Run – Heated Seats – If Equipped
Spare
Auto Shutdown (ASD) Relay 1
Switch Bank/Diagnostic Link Connector/
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) Module – If
Equipped/Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) Module – If Equipped
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) Module – If
Equipped/Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) Module – If Equipped
Passenger Door Module (PDM)/Driver
Door Module (DDM)
Power Top Module – If Equipped
CAUTION!
•
•
102
When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
TIRE PRESSURES
• Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire, at least monthly and
inflate to the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
• The tire pressures recommended for your vehicle are found on the “Tire and Loading
Information” label located on the driver’s side door opening.
NOTE:
Refer to the Owner's Manual on the DVD for
more information regarding tire warnings
and instructions.
WARNING!
•
•
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. Under-inflation is
the leading cause of tire failure and may result in severe cracking, component
separation, or “blow out”. Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause damage that results in tire failure.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle. Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
103
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be
cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven
cleaner. These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Avoid automatic car
washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel's protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
EXTERIOR BULBS
LIGHT BULBS – Exterior
Low Beam Headlamp
High Beam Headlamp
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp
Front Fog Lamp
Front Side Marker Lamp
Center High Mounted Stop (CHMSL) Lamp
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Signal Lamp
Backup Lamp
License Lamp
104
Bulb Number
9006
9005
3457A
H11
WY5W
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
921
W5W
CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CHRYSLER GROUP LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: 1–800–423–6343
CHRYSLER CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1–800–465–2001 (English) Phone: 1–800–
387–9983 (French)
ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING IMPAIRED
• To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional
teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1–800–380–CHRY. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1–800–855–0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
PUBLICATIONS ORDERING
• If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain one free
printed copy of the Owner's Manual, Warranty Booklet or Radio Manuals on your DVD by
calling 1–800–423–6343 (U.S.) or 1–800–387–1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
• Replacement User Guide kits or DVDs or, if you prefer, additional printed copies of the
Owner's Manual, Warranty Booklet or Radio Manuals may be purchased by visiting
www.techauthority.com or by calling 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) or 1–800–387–1143
(Canada). Visa, Master Card, American Express and Discover orders are accepted. If you
prefer mailing your order, please call the above numbers for an order form.
NOTE:
• A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
• The Owner's Manual and User Guide electronic files are also available on the Chrysler,
Jeep, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT websites.
• Click on the “For Owners” tab, select “Owner/Service Manuals”, then select your desired
model year and vehicle from the drop down lists.
105
CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS IN THE UNITED STATES
• If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a collision or cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
• If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your
authorized dealer and the manufacturer.
• To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236
(TTY: 1–800–424–9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
• If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer
Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle
Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
• French Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls
at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere/
106
MOPAR® ACCESSORIES
AUTHENTIC ACCESSORIES BY MOPAR®
• The following highlights just some of the many Authentic Dodge Accessories by Mopar®
featuring a fit, finish, and functionality specifically for your Dodge Avenger.
• In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain far more than expressive style, premium
protection, or extreme entertainment, you also benefit from enhancing your vehicle with
accessories that have been thoroughly tested and factory-approved.
• For the full line of Authentic Dodge Accessories by Mopar®, visit your local Dodge
dealership or online at mopar.com for U.S. residents or mopar.ca for Canadian residents.
EXTERIOR:
• Front End Cover
• Hitch Receiver
• Chrome Wheel
• Wheel Locks
• Sunroof Air Deflector
• Rear Spoiler
• Locking Fuel Cap
• Chrome Exhaust Tip
• Front Air Deflector
• Molded Splash Guards
• Vehicle Cover
INTERIOR:
• Premium Carpet Floor Mats
• Slush Mats
• Door Sill Guards
• Ambient Light Kit
• Roadside Safety Kit
• Molded Cargo Tray
• Katzkin Leather Interiors
ELECTRONICS:
• Park Distance Sensors
• Kicker® Sound System
• Mopar® Web (WiFi)
• Remote Start
• Rearview Mirror with Back-up • Electronic Vehicle Tracking
Camera and Bluetooth® System
Hands Free Phone
CARRIERS:
• Hitch-mount Bike Carrier
• Roof-mount Bike Carrier
• Roof Box Cargo Carrier
• Roof-mount Ski and Snow- • Roof-mount Water Sports • Roof-mount Canoe Carrier
board Carrier
Carrier
• Roof-mount Cargo Bag
• Kicker® is a registered trademark of Stillwater Designs and Audio, Inc.
107
INDEX
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Air Recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Alarm (Security Alarm). . . . . . . . . . .9
Arming System (Security Alarm). . . . . .9
Audio Jack . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 34, 39
Audio Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .30, 33
Audio Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . .30
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . .20
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . .25
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System
Master Cylinder . . . . . . .
Break-In Recommendations, New
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . .10
. . . .95
. . . .96
. . . .20
Calibration, Compass. . . . . . . . . . .66
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . .31, 34
Change Oil Indicator . . . . . . . . . . .78
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . .79
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . .30, 32, 35
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . .66
Cooling System
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . .95
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . .23
Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . .105
Defects, Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . .106
Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . .21
Disarming, Security System . . . . . . .10
Electronics
Your Vehicle's Sound System . .28, 29
Electronic Speed Control
(Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . .74
108
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency, In Case of
Brake Warning Light . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . .
Engine
Break-In Recommendations . . .
Compartment . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . .
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . .
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . .
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . .
. .67
. .76
. .79
. .85
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.20
.93
.95
.85
.95
.95
.95
.78
.91
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 21
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . .90
Front Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Fuel
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . .78
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . .68
GPS Navigation (Uconnect® gps) . . . . .43
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . .21
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 25
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . .68
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Instrument Cluster
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Interior and Instrument Lights . . . . .4, 5
INDEX
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . .22
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
iPod®/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . .59
Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . .66
Jacking Instructions
Jack Location . . . .
Jack Operation . . .
Jump Starting . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .80
. . .79
.79, 80
. . .85
Key Fob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Key Fob Programmable Features . . . . .67
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . .21
Lane Change Assist. . . . . . . . . . . .21
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . .10
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12, 13
Lights
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . .74
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . .100
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . .96
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Mirrors
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 25
MOPAR® Accessories . . . . . . . . . .107
Navigation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Navigation System (Uconnect® gps) . . .42
Navigation Voice Prompt Volume. . .42, 52
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . .20
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . .78
Oil, Engine
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Outlet
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . .78
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Placard, Tire and Loading
Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Power
Glass Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . .71
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 96
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . .79
Programmable Electronic Features. . . .67
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 33
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . .22
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . .73
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . .9
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . .106
Satellite Radio (Uconnect®
studios) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 34
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . .96
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15, 16
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . .88
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Speed Control
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Starting
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Steering
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . .59
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . .14
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . .19
Tires
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Touchscreen Radio
Cleaning Your Touchscreen
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 51
109
INDEX
Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome .
Trailer Towing
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . .
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.72
.89
.73
.73
. .72
. .72
. .95
. .21
Uconnect® Voice Command . . . . . . .63
110
Vehicle Security Alarm Arming . . . . . .9
Vehicle Security Alarm Disarming . . . .10
Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Voice Prompt Volume
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 52
Volume
Navigation Voice Prompt . . . . .42, 52
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . .22
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . .104
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . .22
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . .22
FAQ (How To?)
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
GETTING STARTED
• How do I install my LATCH Equipped Child Seat? pg. 12
• How do I fold down my rear seat? pg. 17
ELECTRONICS
• Which radio is in my vehicle?
• Uconnect® 130 pg. 30
• Uconnect® 130 WITH SiriusXM pg. 32
• Uconnect® 430/430N pg. 35
• Uconnect® 730N pg. 44
• How do I activate the Audio Jack?
• Uconnect® 130 pg. 34
• Uconnect® 130 WITH SiriusXM pg. 34
• Uconnect® 430/430N pg. 39
• Uconnect® 730N pg. 48
• How do I set the clock on my radio?
• Uconnect® 130 pg. 32
• Uconnect® 130 WITH SiriusXM pg. 32
• Uconnect® 430/430N pg. 35
• Uconnect® 730N pg. 45
• How do I use the Navigation feature?
• Uconnect® 430/430N pg. 41
• Uconnect® 730N pg. 51
• How do I pair my cell phone via Bluetooth® with the Uconnect® Hands-Free Voice
Activation System? pg. 61
• How do I use my iPod®? pg. 59
• How do I use my USB port to listen to audio through my touch-screen radio? pg. 59
• How do I configure my Universal Garage Door Opener ((HomeLink®)? pg. 68
UTILITY
• How do I know how much I can tow with my Dodge Avenger? pg. 72
111
FAQ (How To?)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• What do I do if my TPMS warning light is blinking? pg. 74
• How do I change a flat tire? pg. 79
• How do I Jump-Start my vehicle? pg. 85
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Where is my Fuse Block located? pg. 101
• What type of oil do I use? pg. 95
• How often should I change my engine’s oil? pg. 96
• What should my tire pressure be set at? pg. 103
112
dodge.com
This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly acquainted with your new Dodge and to
provide a convenient reference source for common questions. However, it is not a substitute for
your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions, maintenance procedures and important safety messages,
please consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect® Manuals and other Warning Labels in
your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on
accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada)
or your local Dodge dealer.
> IMPORTANT
This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle.
The DVD enclosed contains your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect® Manuals, Warranty
Booklets, Tire Warranty and Roadside Assistance (new vehicles purchased in the U.S.) or
Roadside Assistance (new vehicles purchased in Canada) in electronic format. We hope you
find it useful. Replacement DVD kits may be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Copyright 2013 Chrysler Group LLC.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you
may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Owner’s
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect® Manuals or Warranty Booklet
by calling 1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
or by contacting your dealer.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in a collision and personal injury. Chrysler Group
LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or
feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices such as cell
phones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the
vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is
also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself
unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and
stop your vehicle. Some States or Provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting
while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
1425229_14b_Avenger_UG_072513.indd 2
Driving and alcohol
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be
seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t
drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
7/25/13 10:50 AM
Download a FREE electronic copy of the
Owner’s Manual or Warranty Booklet
by visiting the Owners tab at:
www.dodge.com (U.S.)
www.dodge.ca (Canada)
> 2014 AVENGER // User Guide
14D41-926-AA
AVENGER
Second Edition
User Guide
1425229_14b_Avenger_UG_072513.indd 1
7/25/13 10:50 AM
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising